Yamaha DTX502 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Instrumentos musicales
Tipo
Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

FR
EN
Owners Manual
Mode d’emploi
DTX502
DRUM TRIGGER MODULE
CONVERTISSEUR DE SONS POUR BATTERIE
EnglishFrançais
2
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Contents
Welcome ......................................................................... 6
Product Manuals............................................................ 6
Setup
First Steps ...................................................................... 7
Quick Start Guide .......................................................... 8
Choosing Drum Sounds .......................................................... 8
Playing Along with a Song....................................................... 8
Practicing with the Metronome ................................................ 8
Practicing in Training Mode ..................................................... 9
Recording Your Performances................................................. 9
Component Names & Functions ................................ 10
Control Panel..........................................................................10
Rear Panel .............................................................................11
Setting Up for Sound................................................... 12
Connecting the Power ........................................................... 12
Connecting Headphones or Speakers .................................. 12
Connecting a Music Player.................................................... 12
Turning On the Drum Module................................................ 13
Initial Setup ........................................................................... 13
Quickly Disabling Auto Power-Off .......................................... 13
Turning Off the Drum Module ................................................ 14
Restoring the Default Settings............................................... 14
Basic Techniques
Basic DTX502 Operations ........................................... 15
Striking the Drum Pads ............................................... 16
Snare..................................................................................... 16
Hi-hats................................................................................... 17
Cymbals ................................................................................ 18
Selecting & Playing a Kit............................................. 19
Selecting a Kit ....................................................................... 19
Adjusting Pad Sensitivity....................................................... 19
Balancing Instrument Volumes.............................................. 19
Building Your Own Unique Kits ................................. 20
Assigning Voices to Instruments ........................................... 21
Tuning & Changing Cymbal Sizes......................................... 22
Customizing Instrument Voices............................................. 23
Adjusting Instrument Volumes............................................... 24
Adjusting the Stereo Panning of Instruments ........................ 24
Saving Customized Kits.............................................. 25
Performing with a Song .............................................. 26
Selecting a Song ................................................................... 26
Adjusting the Song Volume ................................................... 26
Adjusting the Song Tempo .................................................... 27
Muting a Song’s Drum Parts ................................................. 27
Looping a Song ..................................................................... 28
Playing with Count-In ............................................................ 28
Playing Pad Songs ................................................................ 29
Using the Metronome .................................................. 31
Starting & Stopping ............................................................... 31
Adjusting the Tempo.............................................................. 31
Setting the Overall Volume.................................................... 31
Customizing the Metronome ...................................... 32
Selecting a Click Set ............................................................. 32
Setting the Tempo ................................................................. 33
Setting the Time Signature.................................................... 33
Setting the Timer ................................................................... 33
Setting Individual Volumes .................................................... 34
Changing Sounds for All Subdivisions .................................. 34
Changing Sounds for Individual Subdivisions ....................... 35
Tuning Click-Set Sounds ....................................................... 36
Tapping the Tempo on the Pads............................................ 36
Storing a Customized Click Set ................................. 37
Practicing in Training Mode ....................................... 38
1. G r o o ve Check .................................................................... 38
2. Rhythm Gate ..................................................................... 40
3. Measure Break .................................................................. 41
4. Tempo Up/Down................................................................ 42
5. Change Up ........................................................................ 44
6. Pad Gate ........................................................................... 46
7. P a r t M ute ........................................................................... 47
8. Fast Blast .......................................................................... 49
Recording Your Performances................................... 51
Getting Ready ....................................................................... 51
Recording.............................................................................. 52
Playing Back a Performance ................................................. 52
Naming a User Song............................................................. 53
Deleting a Recorded Performance ........................................ 54
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode ...................... 55
Setting Procedure.................................................................. 56
Storing your settings.............................................................. 56
Integrating Separately Sold Accessories.................. 76
Adding a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad ........................................... 76
Using a KU100 Kick Unit as a Kick Pedal ............................. 76
Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums ................. 77
Adding Drum Pads to an Acoustic Drum Set ........................ 77
Playing the DTX502 Using Acoustic Drums .......................... 77
Mounting the DTX502 on a Hi-Hat Stand.............................. 78
Connecting to a Computer ......................................... 79
Making Connections.............................................................. 79
DTX502 Reference Manual................................................... 79
Reference
Error Messages............................................................ 80
Troubleshooting .......................................................... 81
Data List ....................................................................... 83
Specifications .............................................................. 88
Index ............................................................................. 89
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
3
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one
described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-
mended by Yamaha.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify
any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-
phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer
before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-
mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-
tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with
both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery bein
g
charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and
never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-
rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-
ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-
lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household
type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason
its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,
state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable t
o assist you,
please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-
ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
Yo u should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-
chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-
nent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained
in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or
another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s sup-
plied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-
tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization
to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable
level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential envi-
ronment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guar-
antee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product
is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
tur
ning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by
using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the
interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha
Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : DRUM TRIGGER MODULE
Model Name : DTX502
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
4
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,
or place heavy objects on it.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (page 88) only. Using the wrong adaptor can
result in damage to the instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which
may have accumulated on it.
This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the
instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components
in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use
immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service
personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)
containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such
as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item
may fall over and cause a fire.
When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have
the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-
connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent
damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using
is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately
turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even
when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the
product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a
long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand/rack specified for the instrument. When attaching the
stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause
damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling
over.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Location
DMI-5 1/2
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
5
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn
off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for
all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and
gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set
the desired listening level.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the
panel. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the
instrument or other property, or operational failure.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and
do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time
at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
consult a physician.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the prod-
uct, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the
notices below.
Handling and Maintenance
•Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,
stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric
devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may
generate noise.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibra-
tions, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight,
near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the
possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal
components or unstable operation.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or key-
board.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do
not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data
including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data
is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer pro-
grams and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights
or with respect to which it has license to use others
copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without
limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files,
WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any
unauthorized use of such programs and contents out-
side of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal conse-
quences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLE-
GAL COPIES.
About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this
manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instru-
ment.
The company names and product names in this manual
are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Connections
Handling caution
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Optional Pads
Within this Owner’s Manual, the optional external pads that may be connected to the drum module are referred to by model
name. Please note that these model names were up-to-date as of printing of this manual. Details regarding any subse-
quently released models will be made available via the following web site.
http://www.yamaha.com/
DMI-5 2/2
6
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Welcome
Thank you for purchasing a Yamaha DTX502 Electronic Drum Module.
In order to get the most out of your new instrument, please be sure to read this owner’s manual carefully.
And after doing so, be sure to store this manual in a safe place
so that you can refer back to it again as needed.
Owner’s Manual (this booklet)—Setup, Basic Techniques, Advanced Techniques,
and Reference sections.
Setup:
Describes how to get your DTX502 drum module set up for playing and making initial settings.
Basic Techniques:
Describes the basic techniques used when operating and playing the DTX502.
Advanced Techniques:
Describes the setting of parameters and other more advanced modes of use.
Reference:
Describes troubleshooting techniques and contains other reference materials.
Reference Manual
*: The Reference Manual is not bundled together with the drum module. See page 79 for more details.
The Reference Manual for the DTX502 is made available as a PDF document and contains the following.
Instructions on how to transfer kit data, song data, and audio data from your computer to the drum module.
Reference material that will prove useful when making music using the drum module and a computer
MIDI-related reference information
Using PDF Manuals
The Reference Manual for your DTX502 is made available in digital format as a PDF document. As such, a computer and
suitable software will be required in order to read it. We recommend that Adobe® Reader® be used for this purpose as it
allows you to quickly and easily search for keywords, to print out specific sections, and to conveniently jump from page to
page by clicking embedded links. Keyword searching and link-based navigation in particular are extremely useful functions
available only with digital-type documents.
The most-recent version of Adobe® Reader® can be downloaded from the following web page.
http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/
Product Manuals
Package contents
•Power adaptor
*May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
•Module holder
•Module-holder screw (x2)
•Owner’s Manual (this booklet)
Setup
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
7
First Steps
1.
Open the packages to reveal their contents.
DTX502 Drum Trigger Module
Rack (i.e., RS502)
Pad set (i.e., DTP522, DTP532, DTP542, or DTP562)
2.
Assemble the parts
•Assemble the rack.
Refer to the Owners Manual that came with your rack (i.e.,
RS502).
•Mount the pads and the DTX502 module on the rack.
Refer to the Assembly Manual that came with your pad set.
3.
Make the required connections.
Connect the pads and the DTX502 using the cable provided.
Refer to the Assembly Manual that came with your pad set.
Connect the power adaptor to the DTX502 module and turn on
the module.
See page 12 of this booklet.
4.
Complete the initial setup process.
See Initial Setup on page 13.
5.
Play your electronic drum kit.
Basic techniques used when operating and playing the elec-
tronic drum kit are describ ed in the Basic Techniques section
(pages 15 to 54).
More complex methods are described in the Advanced Tech-
niques section (pages 55 to 79).
120
Selec
t
your ki
t
DtX562K
Setup
Setup
8
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Quick Start Guide
q Press the [KIT] button.
w Turn the Data Dial to select a different
drum kit.
q Press the [SONG] button.
w Turn the Data Dial to select a different
song.
e Press the [ ] button to start play-
back of the song.
q Press the [ ] button.
w To adjust the tempo, hold down the
[SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial.
Choosing Drum Sounds (page 19)
Yo u can also assign sounds to individual
pads. (See page 20.)
Playing Along with a Song (page 26)
To m ute the song’s drum parts, hold down
the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ]
button once again.
Practicing with the Metronome (page 31)
120
q
w
120
e
q
w
120
w
w
q
Setup
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Quick Start Guide
9
q Hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [KIT] button.
w Turn the Data Dial to select one of the
drum modules training options.
e Press the flashing button ([ ] or
[]) when you are ready to go.
q Hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [SONG] button.
w Press the [ ] button to start
recording.
e When you are finished drumming,
press the [ ] button to stop record-
ing.
Practicing in Training Mode (page 38)
Eight different training options are available
on your DTX502. See page 38 for more
details of each.
Recording Your Performances (page 51)
Yo u can use the [ ] button to start and
stop the playback of your recording. (See
page 52.)
120
q
q
w
120
we
q
q
Setup
10
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Component Names & Functions
q [ ] (Standby/On) button (page 13)
Use this button to turn the drum module on and off.
w Metronome lights
When the metronome is playing, the red light flashes on the
start of each measure; the green light flashes on every other
beat.
e Number display
The number display is used to indicate the tempo, mode-spe-
cific numbers, and timer values. (See page 74.)
r LCD screen
The LCD screen presents information needed to operate the
DTX502.
t VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons (page 15)
These buttons are used to adjust the overall DTX502 vol-
ume—that is, the volume of sound output via the OUTPUT
and [PHONES] jacks.
y [KIT] button (page 19)
• Press the [KIT] button to open the page for selecting differ-
ent drum kits.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] button to
access Training Mode.
• You can also immediately silence all sounds by pressing the
[KIT] button.
u [SONG] button (page 26)
Press the [SONG] button to open the page for selecting dif-
ferent songs.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SONG] button
to put the drum module on standby for recording.
i [ ] button (page 26)
Press the [ ] button to start and stop song playback.
You can also start and stop training using the [ ] but-
ton.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to mute and unmute a song’s drum parts.
o [SHIFT] button
To access the setting area or function indicated above any but-
ton, press it while holding down the [SHIFT] button.
!0 Data Dial
Turn the Data Dial to change the value selected by the flash-
ing cursor. To increase values, turn it clockwise and vice-
versa.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial to
change the tempo.
!1 [<]/[>] buttons
• Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the flashing cursor
between on-screen items. If a setting area has more parame-
ters than will fit on a single page, these buttons can be used
to move between the areas pages.
• Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [<]/[>] but-
tons to select the pad to be set.
Control Panel
120
wxyz{|}
drums
q
t
e
w
r
yu
io
!0
!1
!2 !3
!4 !5
Setup
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Component Names & Functions
11
!2 [ ] button (page 31)
Press the [ ] button to start and stop the built-in metro-
nome.
• In Training Mode, you can use the [ ] button to start and
stop practice sessions.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button to
access the area for advanced metronome settings.
!3 [SAVE/ENTER] button
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button when you want to store
your data.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/
ENTER] button to access Menu Mode for advanced
DTX502 settings.
!4 [PHONES] jack
Use this standard audio jack to connect a pair of stereo head-
phones.
!5 [AUX IN] jack (page 12)
The Auxiliary Input stereo mini-jack is used to input audio
from an external source into the DTX502. For example, you
can use this jack to connect a portable music player, a CD
player, or another similar device and play along with your
favorite tunes.
!6 Trigger input jacks ([qSNARE] to [oHI-HAT])
These trigger input jacks are used to connect pads and/or drum
triggers (such as the Yamaha DT10 or DT20) to your DTX502
so that it may produce sounds in response to the trigger signals
they output.
[qSNARE]
This jack supports three-zone pads and pad controllers.
[wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1], [rTOM3/!2], and
[uKICK/i]
• Each of these jacks comprises a pair of mono trigger
inputs. Using a separately-sold Y-cable*, you can
route trigger signals from mono pads into inputs i,
!0, !1, and !2. (*: For converting a stereo plug into
two mono jacks; see the illustration below.) When a
KP65 Kick Pad is connected here, an additional mono
pad can be connected via the input jack on the back of
the kick pad.
• These jacks also support dual piezo pads.
[tRIDE] and [yCRASH]
These trigger input jacks support three-zone pads
•[oHI-HAT]
This trigger input jack supports three-zone pads and stereo
pads.
Y-cable
!7 [HI-HAT CONTROL] jack
This jack is used to connect an HH65 Hi-hat Controller or the
[HI-HAT CONTROL] output jack of an RHH135 Real Hi-hat
Pad.
!8 [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 79)
This terminal is used to connect the DTX502 to a computer’s
USB terminal via a USB cable.
!9 Cord clip (page 12)
Wrap the power adaptor’s DC cord around this clip to prevent
accidental unplugging during use.
@0 [ ] connector (page 12)
Use this connector for the power adaptor that came with your
drum module.
@1 OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks (page 12)
These standard jacks are used to output audio from the
DTX502. If mono output is required, only the [L/MONO] jack
should be connected.
Rear Panel
@0!9
!6
!8 !7 @1
Mono audio jack
Mono audio jack
Stereo audio plug
Setup
12
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up for Sound
1. Ensure that your drum module is turned off (i.e., nothing is
visible on the LCD screen).
2. Insert the power adaptor’s DC plug into the
[ ] connector on the rear panel.
3. Hook the power adaptor’s DC cord around the cord clip to
prevent it from being accidentally pulled out.
4. Plug the power adaptor’s AC power cord into a domestic wall
socket.
Your DTX502 does not feature built-in speakers. In order to hear
it, therefore, you will need to connect headphones or a DTX-
series monitor system, such as the MS40DR. You can adjust the
output volume using the VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons on the
control panel.
Connecting headphones
Plug your headphones into the [PHONES] jack (for standard
stereo audio).
Connecting speakers
Connect your speakers to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R]
jacks (for standard mono audio).
You can connect a portable music player or another similar
source of audio to your drum module via the [AUX IN] (auxiliary
input) stereo mini-jack. This makes it possible to play along with
your favorite tunes.
Connecting the Power
CAUTION
Excessive bending can damage the power adaptor cord
and create a fire hazard. Ensure, therefore, that the power
cord is not bent at an extreme angle when wrapped around
the clip.
WARNING
Use only the specified adaptor. The use of other adaptors
may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and
the instrument.
CAUTION
Even when the power of this instrument is in the Standby
status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the
minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for
a long time, make sure you unplug the power adaptor from
the wall AC outlet.
Connecting Headphones or Speakers
CAUTION
To prevent hearing loss, avoid using headphones at a high vol-
ume for extended periods of time.
Cord clip
Power adaptor’s DC cord
Connecting a Music Player
Whenever connecting other devices, ensure that the cables
you use have plugs that match the input or output connec-
tors on those devices.
Before making connections, furthermore, you should also
turn the volume on the other devices fully down.
When all connections have been made, use each device’s
volume controller to balance its output with that of the drum
module.
NOTICE
Control panel
Rear panel
1/8” stereo-mini to
stereo-mini cable
Standard 1/4”
stereo-audio jack
Standard 1/4” mono-audio
jack
Portable music
player, etc.
Headphones
Powered speakers
Setup
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up for Sound
13
1. If you have connected your drum module to other audio
devices such as powered speakers, ensure that the volume on
those devices is turned down fully.
2. Press the [ ] (Standby/On) button.
When you turn on your DTX502 for the first time, the Initial
Setup page will be displayed. On this page, you will be required
to specify the following.
1. Identify your drum kit using the Data Dial and press the
[SAVE/ENTER] button.
2. Using the Data Dial, select how long the DTX502 should
wait before turning off automatically, and then press the
[SAVE/ENTER] button.
To quickly disable the Auto Power-Off function, turn on the drum
module while holding down the [ ] button.
Turning On the Drum Module
Initial Setup
Your drum kit’s model number
When you specify the model number, the DTX502 will auto-
matically optimize the trigger output levels for all of your
pads.
Auto Power-Off time
The Auto Power-Off function automatically turns off the
DTX502 after a certain period of inactivity. This helps to con-
serve energy should you forget to turn it off yourself.
Settings
DTX522K, DTX532K, DTX542K, DTX562K,
DTX500K, DTX520K, DTX530K, DTX540K,
DTX550K, DTX560K, DTXP4STD (DTX-
PRESS IV STD SET), DTXP4SP (DTX-
PRESS IV SP SET), DTXPL (DTXPLORER),
DrumTrig, and UserTrig
NOTE
•Your drum kit’s model number is indicated on the box it came
in.
•You can change the specified drum kit at any time after com-
pleting Initial Setup. For details, see the description of the Trig-
ger Setup page from Menu Mode (page 66).
Selec
t
your ki
t
DtX562K
Settings
off (i.e., Auto Power-Off function disabled),
5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 60min, and
120min
Any unsaved changes to parameters will be lost when
the drum module is turned off by the Auto Power-Off
function. Remember to store modified settings regu-
larly.
In certain modes of operation, the Auto Power-Off func-
tion will not turn off the drum module when the set time
has elapsed. We recommend, therefore, that you
always turn off the drum module manually when you
are finished using it.
If you expect your DTX502 to be inactive for a certain
length of time while connected to other audio equip-
ment, we recommend that you turn the volume on the
other equipment fully down. Alternatively, you can dis-
able the Auto Power-Off function to ensure that the
drum module stays on.
NOTE
Settings for the Auto Power-Off function do not represent exact
times and there may be some variation.
By default, the Auto Power-Off time is set to 30 minutes.
•You can change the Auto Power-Off setting at any time after
completing Initial Setup. For details, see the description of the
Auto Power-Off page from Menu Mode (page 75).
Quickly Disabling Auto Power-Off
Au
t
o Power Off
timer= 30min
NOTICE
Au
t
o power off
disabled.
Hold
Setup
Setting Up for Sound
14
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
1. If you have connected your DTX502 to other audio equip-
ment, ensure that the volume on those devices is turned down
fully.
2. Press the [ ] (Standby/On) button.
The Shutdown page will be displayed on the LCD screen, and
the drum module will turn off.
Your drum module’s default settings—collectively known as the
Factory Set—can be conveniently restored at any time if you have
accidentally overwritten them or wish to delete all of your own
settings. To do so, use the Factory Set function as follows.
1. Press the [ ] (Standby/On) button and turn off the
DTX502.
2. Turn the DTX502 back on while holding down the [<] and
[>] buttons.
The Factory Set page will be displayed on the LCD screen,
and the drum module’s default settings will be restored.
After this, the Initial Setup page will be displayed (page 13).
Turning Off the Drum Module
The drum module automatically stores its system settings
before turning off. For this reason, please do not unplug the
power adaptor until the LCD screen is no longer lit. Unsaved
settings from kits, trigger setups, and the like will be lost when
the drum module is turned off. Be sure to store any modified
settings before doing so.
>>> Shu
t
down <<<
Please wai
t
.
NOTICE
Restoring the Default Settings
When you reset parameters as described below, any changes
you have made to them will be lost. Before proceeding, there-
fore, you should ensure that they contain no irreplaceable set-
tings.
NOTICE
Hold
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
15
Basic DTX502 Operations
Adjusting the volume
Press the VOLUME [+] button to increase the volume.
Press the VOLUME [–] button to decrease the volume.
Selecting the parameter to set
Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select different parameters on the screen by moving the flashing
cursor.
A “
” symbol at the bottom-right of the screen indicates that you can move right to another
page. Similarly, a “
” symbol at the bottom-left of the screen indicates that you can move
left to another page.
Changing values
Move the flashing cursor to the parameter you want to edit, and then turn the Data Dial to
change its value. Turn it clockwise to increase values and vice-versa.
>Pad1
” Splash= 30 ‚
120
For adjusting
the volume
For changing values For selecting the parameter to set
NOTE
•To adjust the song volume, hold
down the [SONG] button and press
the VOLUME [+] or [–] button
accordingly (page 26).
•To adjust the metronome volume,
hold down the [ ] button and press
the VOLUME [+] or [–] button
accordingly (page 31).
NOTE
To a d j ust the tempo, hold down the
[SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial
(page 31).
Increase valuesDecrease values
Basic Techniques
Basic Techniques
16
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Striking the Drum Pads
When using a three-zone snare pad such as the XP80, you can produce three distinct sounds (i.e., head, open rim, and closed rim) depend-
ing on where you strike it, much the same as if you were playing an acoustic snare.
Head shots
Striking the main surface of the pad produces a head shot
sound.
Open rim shots
Striking the open-rim zone produces an open rim-shot
sound.
Closed rim shots (cross sticking)
Striking the closed-rim zone produces a closed rim-shot
sound.
Snare
Closed rim shots (Rim 2)
Head shots
Open rim shots (Rim 1)
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Striking the Drum Pads
17
When using a two-zone hi-hat pad such as the RHH135, you can produce a number of distinct sounds, much the same as if you were play-
ing an acoustic hi-hat cymbal.
Open and closed sounds
• You can produce an open hi-hat sound by striking the hi-
hat pad with the hi-hat controller’s pedal not depressed.
• You can produce a closed hi-hat sound by striking the hi-
hat pad with the hi-hat controller’s pedal depressed.
Using a hi-hat pedal, you can recreate the sound of a clos-
ing hi-hat.
Bow shots
Striking the main surface of the hi-hat pad (i.e., the bow
section located between the cup and edge) produces a bow
shot sound.
Edge shots
Striking the outside edge of the hi-hat pad produces an
edge shot sound.
Foot-close sounds
You can depress the hi-hat controller’s pedal to create a
foot-close sound without having to strike the hi-hat pad.
Hi-hat splash sounds
Depressing the hi-hat controller’s pedal and then immedi-
ately releasing it produces a hi-hat splash sound.
Cup shots (PCY100 only)
When using a PCY100 as your hi-hat, you can produce a
cut shot sound by striking the cup section of the pad.
In order to do so, you will need to set the cup switch (CUP
SW) on the rear of the pad to the ON position.
Hi-hats
Edge shots Bow shots
OUTPUT CUP SW
Basic Techniques
Striking the Drum Pads
18
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
When using a three-zone cymbal pad such as the PCY135, you can produce a number of distinct sounds, much the same as if you were
playing an acoustic ride cymbal.
Bow shots
Striking the main surface of the cymbal pad (i.e., the bow
section located between the cup and edge) produces a bow
shot sound.
Edge shots
Striking the outside edge of the cymbal pad produces an
edge shot sound.
Bell shots
Striking the cup produces a bell shot sound.
Choking
Grabbing the edge of a cymbal pad immediately after strik-
ing it will silence the sound being produced.
Muting
Striking the pad while holding the edge will produce a
muted sound.
Cymbals
Edge shots (Rim 1)
Bell shots (Rim 2)
Bow shots
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
19
Selecting & Playing a Kit
In terms of the DTX502, a “kit” is a full set of drum-sound assignments for all of the pads. Your
drum module comes with 50 different drum and percussion kits already set up.
1.
Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area.
Verify that “KIT1” is displayed at the top-left of the screen.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select a different kit.
3.
Play the pads and see how the kit sounds.
A pad’s sensitivity determines how the loudness (or power) of its drum sounds changes depending
on how hard you strike it. You can adjust the sensitivity of all pads as follows to make them more
accurately reflect the dynamics of your drumming.
Hold down the [KIT] button and press either the VOLUME [+]
or [–] button.
Pressing the VOLUME [+] button increases the gain setting, making all of the pads more
sensitive. This means that louder sounds can be more easily produced with softer drumming.
Pressing the VOLUME [–] button decreases the gain setting, making all of the pads less sen-
sitive. This means that louder sounds can only be produced by drumming hard.
If necessary, you can change the volumes of individual instruments (page 20). For example, you
may need to lower the volume of the kick while increasing the volume of the snare. For details on
how to do so, see the description of the Mixer settings page from Menu Mode (page 57).
KIT1
Selecting a Kit
Adjusting Pad Sensitivity
Balancing Instrument Volumes
NOTE
Yo ur kit selection will be retained even
when the DTX502 is turned off.
KIt1
01:Maple Cus
t
om‚
Kit number Kit name
NOTE
With certain drum kits, the Pad Song
function (page 29) will automatically
start playing a song when you strike a
pad.
NOTE
•Adjusting the sensitivity as shown
on the left affects the entire kit.
•If you wish to set sensitivities on an
individual pad basis, see the
description of the Gain page from
Menu Mode (page 68).
a
Ki
t
Gain=100%
b
c
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
d
Hold
Basic Techniques
20
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Building Your Own Unique Kits
It’s easy to build your own unique drum kits with the DTX502—simply change the drum sounds
assigned to the individual pads on pages KIT2 to KIT6 as described below.
To edit a kit, you must first carry out the following two steps.
1. Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area.
2. Turn the Data Dial to select the kit you wish to edit.
The changes that can be made on each of pages KIT2 to KIT6 are described below.
NOTE
The KIT1 page is used only for selecting different kits.
When any of a kit’s parameters have been changed but not yet saved, an
asterisk (*) will appear beside the page name at the top-left of the screen. The
asterisk will disappear when you save your settings. (See page 25.)
If you select another kit without saving your changes, they will be lost.
Voices, instruments, and kits
Pads such as the snare, hi-hat, and cymbals (pages 16 to 18) have
been designed to trigger different voices (or sounds) depending on
the zone of the pad that is struck (see Input Sources on page 29). In
terms of the DTX502, an “instrument” is a collection of the voices
assigned to the various zones of a specific pad. A kit comprises a full
set of instruments—one for each pad.
Closed rim shots
Head shots
Open rim shots
Tip
NOTICE
KIt2* Snare
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
KIt1
01:Maple Cus
t
om‚
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Building Your Own Unique Kits
21
1.
Navigate to the KIT2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Strike the pad whose instrument voice you wish to
change.
3.
If necessary, move the cursor to the voice category
using the [<]/[>] buttons.
4.
If necessary, turn the Data Dial to select a different
voice category.
Voices are organized into the following categories on the DTX502.
5.
Move the cursor to the voice number using the [<]/[>]
buttons.
6.
Turn the Data Dial to select a different voice.
KIT2
Assigning Voices to Instruments
K Kick H Hi-hat
S Snare P Percussion
T To m E Effect
C Cymbal W Wave Voice
KIt2 Snare
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
NOTE
As an alternative to selecting a pad by
striking it, you can change the current
selection by pressing the [<]/[>] but-
tons with the [SHIFT] button held
down.
KIt2 Snare
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
NOTE
The term “Wave Voice” refers to an
audio file transferred from a computer
to your DTX502 via USB (page 79).
KIt2* Snare
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
NOTE
When voice number 0 (“No Assign”)
is selected for an instrument, it will
not produce any sound when struck.
To assign a voice to a specific zone,
strike the zone while holding down
the [SHIFT] button. For details, see
Tip: Input Sources on page 29.
•Two different voices can be simulta-
neously assigned to each pad or
zone. For details, see the descrip-
tion of the Layers page from Menu
Mode (page 57).
Basic Techniques
Building Your Own Unique Kits
22
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
1.
Navigate to the KIT3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Strike the pad whose instrument tuning or cymbal size
you wish to change.
3.
Turn the Data Dial to change the tuning or cymbal size.
The content of the page will vary depending on the voice category selected for the
instrument in question.
Kick (K), Snare (S), Tom (T), Percussion (P), Effect (E), or Wave
Voice (W):
Raise or lower the parameter value to change the tuning (i.e., pitch) of the voice.
Cymbal (C) or Hi-hat (H):
Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the cymbal
size.
KIT3
Tuning & Changing Cymbal Sizes
NOTE
As an alternative to selecting a pad by
striking it, you can change the current
selection by pressing the [<]/[>] but-
tons with the [SHIFT] button held
down.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Building Your Own Unique Kits
23
1.
Navigate to the KIT4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Strike the pad whose instrument voice you wish to cus-
tomize.
3.
Turn the Data Dial to customize the voice.
The way in which the voice can be customized varies depending on the voice category
selected for the instrument in question.
Kick (K), Snare (S), and Tom (T):
Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the degree of
muffling (i.e., head muting).
Cymbal (C):
Raise or lower the parameter value to change the cymbal’s sustain time (i.e., how
quickly the sound decays to silence).
Hi-hat (H):
Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the hi-hat’s
clutch position. The smaller the setting, the quicker an open hi-hat sound will
decay to silence.
Percussion (P), Effect (E), or Wave Voice (W):
Raise or lower the parameter value to change how quickly the sound decays to
silence.
KIT4
Customizing Instrument Voices
NOTE
As an alternative to selecting a pad by
striking it, you can change the current
selection by pressing the [<]/[>] but-
tons with the [SHIFT] button held
down.
NOTE
The hi-hat clutch position setting
applies to all kits.
Basic Techniques
Building Your Own Unique Kits
24
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
1.
Navigate to the KIT5 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Strike the pad whose instrument volume you wish to
adjust.
3.
Turn the data dial to change the instrument volume.
1.
Navigate to the KIT6 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Strike the pad whose instrument panning you wish to
change.
3.
Turn the Data Dial to change the pan setting.
KIT5
Adjusting Instrument Volumes
KIT6
Adjusting the Stereo Panning of Instruments
NOTE
As an alternative to selecting a pad by
striking it, you can change the current
selection by pressing the [<]/[>] but-
tons with the [SHIFT] button held
down.
KIt5* Snare
” Volume=110 ‚
NOTE
As an alternative to selecting a pad by
striking it, you can change the current
selection by pressing the [<]/[>] but-
tons with the [SHIFT] button held
down.
KIt6* Snare
” Pan= C
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
25
Saving Customized Kits
You can now save your customized kit as one of the drum module’s User kits, which are num-
bered 51 to 100. User kits are retained in memory even when the DTX502 is turned off.
1.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select the User kit (51 to 100) in
which you wish to save your settings.
3.
If necessary, name your new drum kit.
Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and
then turn the Data Dial to change it.
4.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again.
To cancel the process without saving any settings, press the [ ] button.
5.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to save your settings.
User kit data can be transferred between your DTX502 and a computer via
USB. For details, refer to Connecting to a Computer (page 79) and the Refer-
ence Manual (PDF).
KIt sa
V
e
t
o 51
:[Maple Cus
t
om]
NOTE
Customized kits cannot be saved to
the drum modules Preset kits, which
are numbered 1 to 50.
When you save new settings to
a User kit, its current settings
will be overwritten. Before pro-
ceeding, therefore, you should
ensure that the kit in question
contains no irreplaceable set-
tings.
NOTICE
KIt sa
V
e
t
o 51
:[Oaple Cus
t
om]
KIt sa
V
e
t
o 51
Are you sure?
Basic Techniques
26
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Performing with a Song
Your DTX502 comes complete with a full complement of practice songs. Covering a wide range
of genres, they provide a convenient, enjoyable way to practice drumming.
Songs are selected on the SONG1 page.
Press the [SONG] button to open the SONG1 page.
1.
Verify that “SONG1” is displayed at the top-left of the
screen.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to choose a song to play along with.
3.
Press the [ ] button.
The song will start to play. You can stop the song by pressing the [ ] button once
again.
1.
Press the [ ] button to start the song.
2.
To adjust the song’s volume, hold down the [SONG]
button and press either the VOLUME [+] or [–] button.
SONG1
Selecting a Song
Adjusting the Song Volume
SONG1
01:Demo ‚
Song number Song name
NOTE
•Your song selection will be retained
even when the DTX502 is turned
off.
The most appropriate drum kit is
pre-assigned to each of the drum
module’s songs, so whenever you
select another song, the current kit
will also change. You can, however,
use the Kit Lock function to prevent
this if you wish to keep the current
kit when practicing with different
songs. (See page 73.)
a
Song Volume=13
b
c
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
d
Hold
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Performing with a Song
27
1.
Press the [ ] button to start the song.
2.
To adjust the tempo, hold down the [SHIFT] button and
turn the Data Dial.
1.
Press the [ ] button to start the song.
2.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] but-
ton to mute and unmute the song’s drum parts.
When the drum parts have been muted, the symbol “ M ” will be displayed on-screen.
Adjusting the Song Tempo
Muting a Song’s Drum Parts
NOTE
The tempo can be freely set
between 30 and 300 BPM.
•You can also use the Tap Tempo
function (page 36) to set the tempo
by striking pads.
Hold
NOTE
Yo u can also mute and unmute indi-
vidual drum and accompaniment
parts. For details, see the description
of Part Mute from Training Mode
(page 47).
SONG1
M
01:Demo ‚
Hold
Basic Techniques
Performing with a Song
28
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
On the SONG2 page, you can set the current song to be played repeatedly in looped fashion.
1.
Press the [SONG] button.
2.
Navigate to the SONG2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Turn the Data Dial to change the loop setting.
When Loop is set to “off”, the song will stop automatically when it has played to the
end.
When Loop is set to “on”, the song will start again from the beginning when it has
played to the end.
On the SONG3 page, you can set whether or not you would like to be counted in before the song
starts.
1.
Press the [SONG] button.
2.
Navigate to the SONG3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Turn the Data Dial to change the count-in setting.
When PlayCount is set to “off”, you will not be counted in.
When PlayCount is set to “on”, you will be counted in over two measures.
SONG2
Looping a Song
SONG3
Playing with Count-In
SONG2
” Loop=off ‚
NOTE
The loop setting for User songs is
retained even when the DTX502 is
turned off.
SONG3
”PlayCoun
t
=off ‚
NOTE
The count-in setting applies to all
songs.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Performing with a Song
29
The term “pad song” refers to songs that can be played by striking a specific drum pad. In the
same way as snare sounds are produced by striking a pad to which a snare voice has been
assigned, you can start and stop the playback of pad songs by striking the pads to which they are
assigned.
Assigning a pad song to a pad
1.
Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area.
2.
Using the Data Dial, select the kit you wish to edit.
3.
Navigate to the KIT2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
4.
To select an input source, hold down the [SHIFT]
button and strike the corresponding pad or zone.
Playing Pad Songs
When any of a kit’s parameters
have been changed but not yet
saved, an asterisk (*) will
appear beside the page name at
the top-left of the screen. The
asterisk will disappear when
you save your settings. (See
page 25.)
NOTICE
KIt1
01:Maple Cus
t
om‚
KIt2 Snare
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
NOTE
Pad songs are assigned to input
sources, not to instruments.
NOTE
Tom 1, Tom 2, Tom 3, Kick, Pad 8,
Pad 10, Pad 11, and Pad 12 each
have only one input source.
Input Sources
Each zone of an instrument (page 20) corresponds to one of the drum mod-
ule’s input sources. The snare instrument, for example, combines three dis-
tinct input sources—the head, the open rim, and the closed rim. As shown
in the table, only the snare, the ride cymbal, the crash cymbal, and the hi-
hat have more than one input source.
*1: These input sources apply when the Snares parameter from the KitC6 page (page 62) is
set to “off.
*2: These input sources apply when using a PCY100 as a hi-hat.
Instrument
Input sources
Snare
snare Head
snare OpenRim
snare ClosedRim
snare(off) Head
(*1)
snare(off) OpenRim
(*1)
snare(off) ClosedRim
(*1)
Ride
ride Bow
ride Edge
ride Cup
Crash
crash Bow
crash Edge
crash Cup
HiHat
hihat Open
hihat EdgeOpen
hihat CupOpen
(*2)
hihat Close
hihat EdgeClose
hihat CupClose
(*2)
hihat FootClose
hihat FootSplash
Instrument
Input sources
Tip
Basic Techniques
Performing with a Song
30
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
5.
If necessary, move the cursor to the voice category
using the [<]/[>] buttons.
6.
Turn the Data Dial to select “ e ” (pad song) as the
voice category.
7.
Move the cursor to the song number using the [<]/
[>] buttons.
8.
Turn the Data Dial to choose a pad song.
See the Data List section (page 83) for details of the available pad songs.
Setting Repeat and Play modes
Setting the pad song’s Repeat mode
1.
Move the cursor to the Repeat mode symbol using
the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to change the mode setting.
: Normal play
: Repeat play—that is, the song starts again from the beginning after
playing to the end
Setting the pad song’s Play mode
1.
Move the cursor to the Play mode symbol using
the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to change the mode setting.
: The pad song will start or stop accordingly whenever the pad is struck.
: The pad song will play one measure at a time whenever the pad is
struck.
: If any other pad song of the same type is already playing, it will be
stopped before playing the pad song selected here.
KIt2 snareHd
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
KIt2* snareHd
”Ö01:Demo ≥‚
KIt2* snareHd
”Ö01:Demo ≥‚
NOTE
Pad songs are played back inde-
pendent of the main song selected
on the SONG1 page.
Pad songs cannot be played when
recording a song or when practicing
in Training Mode.
KIt2* snareHd
”Ö39:Funk C ≥‚
Repeat mode Play mode
μ
Â
Ê
Á
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
31
Using the Metronome
Playing your electronic drum kit along with the built-in metronome is a great way to perfect
your rhythm.
Press the [ ] button to start the metronome.
The red metronome light (left) flashes on the start of each measure; the green light (right)
flashes on every other beat.
The current metronome tempo is shown by the number display.
Press the [ ] button once again to stop the metronome.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial.
Hold down the [ ] button and press either the VOLUME [+]
or [–] button.
You can set the overall metronome volume between “0” (off) and “16” (loudest).
Starting & Stopping
Adjusting the Tempo
Setting the Overall Volume
Flashes greenFlashes red
Hold
NOTE
The overall volume setting applies to
all click sets.
a
ClickVolume=10
b
c
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
d
Hold
Basic Techniques
32
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Customizing the Metronome
This section describes how to make advanced metronome settings. A total of six pages (CLK1
to CLK6) are used for this purpose.
The individual parameters that can be changed on pages CLK1 to CLK6 will now be described.
The following four metronome settings can be made on the CLK1 page.
Click set selection
•Tempo
Time signature
•Timer
To open the CLK1 page, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button.
The term “click set” is used to describe a collection of metronome settings. You can customize
these click sets as necessary, and your DTX502 can store up to 30 of them. The following
describes how to recall a previously stored click set.
1.
Move the cursor to the click set number using the [<]/
[>] buttons.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to choose a click set.
Click sets are numbered 1 to 30.
Whenever you change metronome parameters as described on the following pages, it is wise to
store them. Details on how to do so can be found in Storing a Customized Click Set (page 37).
When any of a click set’s parameters have been changed but not yet stored,
an asterisk (*) will appear beside the page name at the top-left of the screen.
The asterisk will disappear when you store your settings. (See page 37.)
CLK1
Selecting a Click Set
NOTICE
CLK1* ∫ 4/4
01:User ⁄=123‚
CLK1* ∫ 4/4
01:User ⁄=123‚
Hold
Metronome area
(first page)
Click set number: Click set name
Metronome
timer
Time signature
Temp o
NOTE
Yo ur click-set selection will be
retained even when the DTX502 is
turned off.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Customizing the Metronome
33
1.
Move the cursor to the number to the right of the “ =
symbol using the [<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to change the tempo setting.
The tempo can be freely set between 30 and 300 BPM.
1.
Move the cursor to the time signature display using the
[<]/[>] buttons.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to set the time signature.
The available time signature settings are 1/4 to 16/4, 1/8 to 16/8, and 1/16 to 16/16.
By setting the metronome’s timer, you can have it turn off automatically after the set time has
elapsed.
1.
Move the cursor to the “ ” symbol using the [<]/[>]
buttons.
The “ ” symbol will be replaced by a number.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to set the metronome timer.
The time can be freely set between 0 seconds (i.e., the timer is disabled) and 600 sec-
onds in units of 30 seconds.
CLK1
Setting the Tempo
CLK1
Setting the Time Signature
CLK1
Setting the Timer
NOTE
•If you hold down the [SHIFT] button
and turn the Data Dial, you can
change the tempo without having to
move the cursor to the number to
the right of the= ” symbol.
•You can also use the Tap Tempo
function (page 36) to set the tempo
by striking pads.
NOTE
The metronome timer setting
applies to all click sets.
The metronome timer does not
operate when in Training Mode.
Basic Techniques
Customizing the Metronome
34
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
On the CLK2 page, you can set the volumes of individual metronome subdivisions.
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to access the Metronome area.
2.
Navigate to the CLK2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Move the cursor to “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, ”, ßß ”, or Œ
so that you may adjust the volume for that subdivision.
4.
Turn the data dial to adjust the volume of the selected
subdivision.
The volume for each subdivision may be freely adjusted between “0” (silent) and “9”
(loudest). The following shows the timing of the individual metronome subdivisions
when there are four beats per measure.
On the CLK3 page, you can change the sounds for all metronome subdivisions (i.e., “
A˘ ”,
¤ ”, “ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”).
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to access the Metronome area.
2.
Navigate to the CLK3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
CLK2
Setting Individual Volumes
CLK3
Changing Sounds for All Subdivisions
NOTE
A˘ ”, á ”, , and “ ßß ” subdivi-
sion volumes can be set when the
time signature is set to 3/8, 6/8, 9/8,
12/8, or 15/8.
CLK2* A˘=9 ¤=9
” ‹=0 ßß=0 Œ=0 ‚
¤
ßß
Œ
CLK3* Sound
1:Me
t
ronome ‚
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Customizing the Metronome
35
3.
Turn the Data Dial to choose a metronome sound set.
The following six sets are available on your DTX502.
On the CLK4 page, you can freely assign different sounds to each of the metronome subdivisions
(i.e., “
A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”).
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to access the Metronome area.
2.
Navigate to the CLK4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Move the cursor to the subdivision symbol to the right
of “Sound=” (i.e., “ A˘ ”, ¤ ”, “ ”, ßß ”, orŒ ”),
and turn the Data Dial to select the one to set.
4.
Move the cursor to the sound category, and if neces-
sary, turn the Data Dial to select a different category.
Voices are organized into the following categories on the DTX502.
5.
Move the cursor to the sound number, and if necessary,
turn the Data Dial to select a different sound.
1 Metronome1 4 Stick
2 Metronome2 5 Human 1
3 Cowbell 6 Human 2
CLK4
Changing Sounds for Individual Subdivisions
K Kick P Percussion
S Snare E Effect
T To m W Wave Voice
C Cymbal
ë
Spoken Count
H Hi-hat
CLK4* Sound=A˘
E01:Click1 Acc‚
NOTE
ë ” can be selected only for “ A˘
and “
¤.
NOTE
When voice number 0 (“No Assign”) is
selected, the corresponding metro-
nome subdivision will not produce
any sound.
Basic Techniques
Customizing the Metronome
36
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
On the CLK5 page, you can tune the sounds for each of the metronome subdivisions (i.e., “ A˘ ”,
¤ ”, “ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”).
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to access the Metronome area.
2.
Navigate to the CLK5 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Move the cursor to the subdivision symbol to the right
of “Sound=” (i.e., “ A˘ ”, ¤ ”, “ ”, ßß ”, orŒ ”),
and turn the Data Dial to select the one to set.
4.
Move the cursor to the number to the right of “Tune=”,
and turn the Data Dial to change the tuning.
Metronome subdivision sounds can be tuned between -24.0 and +24.0 semitones.
On the CLK6 page, you can use the Tap Tempo function to set the tempo by striking pads.
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button
to access the Metronome area.
2.
Navigate to the CLK6 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
3.
Strike a pad at least three times at the desired tempo.
The tapped tempo will be displayed on-screen.
CLK5
Tuning Click-Set Sounds
CLK6
Tapping the Tempo on the Pads
CLK5* Sound=A˘
” tune=+ 0.0 ‚
CLK6* tAP tEMPO
” ⁄=120
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
37
Storing a Customized Click Set
After you have customized a click set (as described on pages 32 through 36), you should store
it to prevent your settings being lost when the DTX502 is turned off.
1.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select the click set (1 to 30) in
which you wish to store your settings.
3.
If necessary, name your new click set.
Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and
then turn the Data Dial to change it.
4.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again.
To cancel the process without storing any settings, press the [ ] button.
5.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to store your settings.
CLK sa
V
e
t
o 01
:[User ]
When you store new settings to
a click set, its current settings
will be overwritten. Before pro-
ceeding, therefore, you should
ensure that the click set in
question contains no irreplace-
able settings.
NOTICE
CLK sa
V
e
t
o 01
:[tser ]
CLK sa
V
e
t
o 01
Are you sure?
Basic Techniques
38
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
Your DTX502 comes complete with eight different types of training that allow you to improve
various drumming skills while having fun at the same time. You can work on your sense of
rhythm, learn drum patterns from a wide range of different musical genres, and even practice
playing as wildly as you can.
As an aid to improving your timing, Groove Check displays on-screen how early or late you are
drumming. Two different training styles are available—the first uses the metronome; the second
lets you play along with a song. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-
screen.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “01:Groove Check”.
The [ ] and [ ] buttons will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is
on standby to start training.
3.
Press either the [ ] or [ ] button when you are
ready to go.
If you press the [ ] button, the current song will be used for training. If you
press the [ ] button, the metronome will be used.
•If you wish to train along with a specific song, you should select that song in the Song area
in advance (page 26).
•To adjust the training tempo before starting, hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the
Data Dial (page 31).
NOTE
The following cannot be used in Training Mode.
Pad Song
•Pad Function
1. Groove Check
Training Mode
Improving your sense of rhythm
1. Groove Check................................................................................................... page 38
2. Rhythm Gate .................................................................................................... page 40
3. Measure Break................................................................................................. page 41
4. Tempo Up/Down............................................................................................... page 42
5. Change Up ....................................................................................................... page 44
Learning drum patterns
6. Pad Gate .......................................................................................................... page 46
7. P a r t M ute .......................................................................................................... page 47
Playing as wildly as you can
8. Fast Blast ......................................................................................................... page 49
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
39
4.
Play the pads as tightly as you can along with the
metronome or song.
Display of individual strikes
The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol.
When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center
of the scale.
If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of
the scale.
If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of
the scale.
Range of timing variation
The range of variation in the timing of your drumming is shown by the band
(
E) at the bottom of the screen.
The wider the band, the larger the degree of variation in your drumming.
5.
To end training, press the button used to start it in
Step 3 above.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
If you press the [>] button while your score is displayed, you will be able to view
your individual variation ranges for the hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cymbals.
The wider the band (
E) at the bottom of the screen, the larger the degree of varia-
tion in your drumming.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
NOTE
Yo u can adjust the training tempo by
turning the Data Dial.
ª
---
EEnEE
---
Accurate timing
Struck late
Timing of current
strike
Range of timing variation
Struck early
NOTE
•If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
If looping (page 28) is turned off for
the selected song, training will finish
when the song plays once to the
end.
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
40
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
As an aid to improving your timing, Rhythm Gate displays on-screen any variation in the timing
of your drumming. If you do not strike a pad in time with the metronome or song, it will not pro-
duce any sound. Two different training styles are available—the first uses the metronome; the sec-
ond lets you play along with a song. When you have finished training, your score will be
displayed on-screen.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “02:Rhythm Gate”.
The [ ] and [ ] buttons will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is
on standby to start training.
3.
Press either the [ ] or [ ] button when you are
ready to go.
If you press the [ ] button, the current song will be used for training. If you
press the [ ] button, the metronome will be used.
4.
Play the pads as tightly as you can along with the
metronome or song.
A pad will only produce a sound if you strike it while the gate is open. The width of
the gate represents the difficultly level.
Display of individual strikes
The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol.
When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center
of the scale.
If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of
the scale.
If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of
the scale.
5.
To end training, press the button used to start it in
Step 3 above.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
If you press the [>] button while your score is displayed, you will be able to view
the individual percentages of accurately timed strikes for the hi-hat, snare, kick,
toms, and cymbals.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
2. Rhythm Gate
NOTE
Yo u can adjust the training tempo by
turning the Data Dial.
ª
---∆∆’∆∆---
Accurate timing
Struck late
Timing of current
strike
Gate width (i.e., difficulty level)
Struck early
NOTE
•If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
If looping (page 28) is turned off for
the selected song, training will finish
when the song plays once to the
end.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
41
Adjusting the difficulty level
With Rhythm Gate, you can reduce the width of the gate to make training more difficult and
vice-versa.
1.
With “02:Rhythm Gate” selected on the training
menu page (TRNG1), press the [>] button.
The TRNG2 page will be displayed.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to adjust the width of the gate.
The wider the gate, the easier it is to produce a sound by striking the pads and vice-
versa.
3.
Press the [<] button to return to the training menu
page (TRNG1).
With Measure Break training, the metronome will be muted for certain measures in a sequence.
For example, by setting the measures during which you play fills to be muted in this way, you can
check for any deviation in your timing when the metronome returns. This will help you to play at
a constant tempo throughout your performances. When you have finished training, your score will
be displayed on-screen.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “03:MeasureBreak”.
The [ ] button will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to
start training.
3.
Press the [>] button to move to the TRNG2 page.
3. Measure Break
NOTE
The difficulty level cannot be adjusted
while training.
tRNG1
02:Rhy
t
hm Ga
t
e ‚
tRNG2 Ga
t
e Wid
t
h
” ---∆∆’∆∆---
tRNG1
03:MeasureBreak‚
tRNG2
” Meas=3 Brk=1
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
42
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
4.
Set the numbers of measures for which the metro-
nome is to be played and to be silenced.
Using the [<]/[>] buttons, move the cursor to the parameter you wish to set.
Turn the data dial to set the corresponding number of measures between 1 and 8.
5.
Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go.
6.
To end training, press the [ ] button once again.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
Use Tempo Up/Down training to see how fast you can go and still maintain accurate timing. As
you play along with a metronome, the drum module will automatically increase the tempo if your
timing is good and decrease it if not. When you have finished training, your score will be dis-
played on-screen.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “04:Tempo Up/Down.
The [ ] button will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to
start training.
3.
Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go.
4. Tempo Up/Down
tRNG2
” Meas=3 Brk=1
Measures for which the
metronome is not played
Measures for which the
metronome is played
NOTE
Yo u can adjust the training tempo by
turning the Data Dial.
Measure:ƒ
LLLK
Measures for which the
metronome is not played
Measures for which the
metronome is played
NOTE
If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
tRNG1
04:tempo Up/Down
NOTE
Yo u can adjust the training tempo by
turning the Data Dial.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
43
4.
Focusing on accurate timing, play the pads along
with the metronome.
Display of individual strikes
The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol.
When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center
of the scale.
If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of
the scale.
If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of
the scale.
Criteria for increasing or decreasing the tempo
The drum module evaluates your timing every four measures. The more accu-
rate the timing of your drumming during those four measures, the more the
tempo will be raised. If your timing was not accurate, however, the tempo will
be lowered. Similarly, the more inaccurate, the more the tempo will drop.
5.
To end training, press the [ ] button once again.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
⁄=120
g
2
--∆∆∆’∆∆
O
--
Accurate timing Change in tempo
Timing of current strike
Struck lateStruck early
Gate width
(i.e., difficulty level)
NOTE
•If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
•If you wish to adjust the difficulty
level for this training, see the
description of the Difficulty Level
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
This training can be set either to
mute pads when they are not played
in time or to always play pads when-
ever they are struck. For details, see
the description of the Ignore Timing
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
44
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
In Change Up training, your aim is to maintain good timing as you play along with up to seven
different practice rhythms*. The practice rhythm will change automatically after a certain number
of measures, which you can also set. When you have finished training, your score will be dis-
played on-screen.
*: The seven practice rhythm patterns are , , , , , , and .
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “05:Change Up”.
The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to
start training.
3.
Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go.
Display of individual strikes
The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol.
When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center
of the scale.
If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of
the scale.
If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of
the scale.
5. Change Up
3
3
6
É
--∆∆∆’∆∆
O
-- Ñ
Accurate timing Rhythm to be played
Timing of current strike
Struck lateStruck early
Gate width
(i.e., difficulty level)
Next rhythm
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
45
4.
Play the pads along with the practice rhythm.
The practice rhythm will change in the following sequence.
The rhythm to be played is shown at the center of the screen.
The next rhythm is shown flashing at the bottom-right of the screen.
To mute the practice rhythm and play along with only the metronome, hold down
the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button.
To unmute the practice rhythm, again hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the
[ ] button.
5.
To end training, press the [ ] button once again.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
Selecting which practice rhythms to use
Using the following procedure, you can select which of the seven practice rhythms you
wish to use.
1.
With “05:Change Up” selected on the training menu
page (TRNG1), press the [>] button.
The TRNG2 page will be displayed.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select whether to play (“on”) or
skip (“off”) the
É rhythm.
3.
Similarly for the other six rhythms, use the [<]/[>]
buttons to navigate to the corresponding pages, and
turn the Data Dial to select whether to play or skip
them.
Page Rhythm Page Rhythm
TRNG2 (
É ) TRNG6 ( èA)
TRNG3 (
Ñ ) TRNG7 ( ê )
TRNG4 (
ÑA) TRNG8 ( êB)
TRNG5 (
è )
3 63
NOTE
•You can also press the [ ] button
to end training.
•If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
•If you wish to adjust the difficulty
level for this training, see the
description of the Difficulty Level
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
This training can be set either to
mute pads when they are not played
in time or to always play pads when-
ever they are struck. For details, see
the description of the Ignore Timing
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
NOTE
Practice rhythms cannot be selected
while training.
tRNG1
05:Change Up ‚
tRNG2
” É =on ‚
3
3
6
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
46
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Changing the number of measures after which the rhythm
changes
1.
With “05:Change Up” selected on the training menu
page (TRNG1), use the [>] button to navigate to the
TRNG9 page.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select 1, 2, or 4 as the number
of measures after which the rhythm changes.
In Pad Gate training, the pads will only produce a sound when your drumming precisely matches
a practice drum pattern. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.
In addition, you will be able to view the individual hit ratios for each of the drum parts.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “06:Pad Gate”.
The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to
start training.
3.
Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go.
The currently selected song will start to play.
4.
Play the song’s drum pattern on the pads.
The pads will not produce a sound if they are struck out of time.
In addition, the pads will only produce a sound when you play the same drum pat-
tern as in the song.
5.
Use the [<]/[>] buttons to view the individual hit
ratios for the hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cym-
bals—that is, the percentage of times they were
played in time and matching the drum pattern in the
song.
6. Pad Gate
NOTE
The above setting cannot be adjusted
while training.
tRNG9
” Measure=2
0% ¢¢¢¢¢
HiHa
t
HSKtC
Cymbals
Hit ratio
Hi-hat
Snare Toms
Kick
Currently selected drum part
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
47
6.
To end training, press the [ ] button.
Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points.
You can also view your hit ratios for individual drum parts after training has
ended. Use the [<]/[>] buttons to navigate to them from the page displaying the
score.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
Part Mute training lets you mute any or all of the drum parts (i.e., hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and
cymbals) and also the instrument parts from an accompanying song. You can mute the parts in two
different ways—either on-screen or by striking the pad in question. The latter is referred to as
auto-play muting. Note that this type of training is not scored.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “07:Part Mute”.
The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to
start training.
3.
Press the [ ] button to start the currently
selected song.
The letters displayed on-screen correspond to the following parts.
H: Hi-hat
S: Snare
K: Kick
T: Toms
C: Cymbals
B: Bass
O: Other (i.e., accompaniment parts other than bass)
7. Part Mute
NOTE
•If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Timer page from Menu Mode (page
72).
•If you wish to adjust the difficulty
level for this training, see the
description of the Difficulty Level
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
This training can be set either to
mute pads when they are not played
in time or to always play pads when-
ever they are struck. For details, see
the description of the Ignore Timing
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
•You can set which groups of pads
the drum module should consider
when deciding whether or not you
are playing the same drum pattern
as in the song. For details, see the
description of the Pad Gate Group
page from Menu Mode (page 72).
If looping (page 28) is turned off for
the selected song, training will finish
when the song plays once to the
end.
HiHa
t
HSKtC BO
Bass
Hi-hat Cymbals
Snare Toms
Kick
Other (i.e., accompaniment
parts other than bass)
Drum parts Accompaniment
(non-drum) parts
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
48
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
4.
Select the parts to be muted.
Muting on-screen
4-1. Using the [<]/[>] buttons, move the cursor to the part you wish to mute
(H, S, K, T, C, B, or O).
4-2. Turn the data dial to mute (or unmute) the selected part.
The symbol “
M ” will be displayed above any muted part.
Muting with the pads
4-1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button to turn on
auto-play muting.
4-2. Strike the pad corresponding to the drum part you wish to mute.
The part will be muted and the symbol “
N ” will be displayed above the
corresponding letter.
To turn off auto-play muting, again hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [ ] button.
5.
Practice playing the pads along with the song.
6.
To end training, press the [ ] button.
M
HiHa
t
HSKtC BO
NOTE
Auto-play muting cannot be used with
parts muted on-screen.
a
Au
t
o Mu
t
e=on
b
c
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
d
N
HiHa
t
HSKtC BO
NOTE
Auto-play muting of a drum part will
be automatically turned off if a pad
corresponding to that part is not
struck for certain period of time.
NOTE
If looping (page 28) is turned off for
the selected song, training will finish
when the song plays once to the end.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Practicing in Training Mode
49
In a Fast Blast training session, you simply play the drums as wildly as you can over a set period
of time. More a game than a form of practice, your aim is to get the highest possible score. When
you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.
Training procedure
1.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT]
button to access Training Mode.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select “08:Fast Blast”.
3.
Press the [ ] button.
The following will be shown on-screen, indicating that the drum module is on
standby to start training.
4.
Strike a pad when you are ready to go.
Play as many of the pads as often as you can before the time limit.
The timer will start when you strike the first pad.
Your current score and remaining time will be displayed on-screen.
To end a training session before the time limit, press the [ ] button once
again.
5.
When the time limit is reached, the message “Fin-
ished!” will be displayed on-screen together with
your final score.
8. Fast Blast
NOTE
If you wish to adjust the duration of
training, see the description of the
Fast Blast Timer page from Menu
Mode (page 73).
HIt PADS! 10
0 p
Time limit (i.e., the
duration of training)
5.5
18467 p
Score Remaining time
Finished! º
63726 p ‚
Basic Techniques
Practicing in Training Mode
50
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Viewing your power and activity points
5-1. With the message “Finished!” displayed on-screen, press the [>] button.
5-2. The drum module will display your power points (Pwr) and activity
points (Act).
The more powerfully you played the pads, the higher your power
points will be.
The more pads you played, the higher your activity points will be.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
Viewing your high score
5-1. With the message “Finished!” displayed on-screen, press the [>] button
twice.
5-2. The best score you have recorded so far will be displayed.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).
Pwr: 32507 p
Ac
t
: 31219 p‚
Power points
Activity points
BESt SCORE
” 63726 p
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
51
Recording Your Performances
You can record your performances in the DTX502 in the form of User songs.
1.
Press the [SONG] button.
2.
Turn the Data Dial to select the User song (61 to 100)
you wish to record into.
If you wish to record your performance while playing along with a Preset song (1 to
60), you should instead select that song. In such a case, your performance will be
recorded into the lowest numbered User song containing no data.
3.
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SONG]
button to open the REC page.
4.
Move the cursor to the item you want to change using
the [<]/[>] buttons, and then turn the Data Dial to
change its value.
NOTE
Performances recorded in the drum module are not saved as audio files. Instead, they are saved in the form of MIDI data, which
describes which pads were played and when.
The following cannot be used while recording.
•Pad Song
•Pad Function
Getting Ready
You can record into a User
song that already contains
data; however, that data will be
overwritten with your new per-
formance. Before proceeding,
therefore, you should ensure
that the User song in question
contains no irreplaceable data.
NOTICE
NOTE
If no space is available for recording
in User songs, the message “Seq
data is not empty.will be displayed.
REC ⁄=120
Quan
t
ize=off 4/4
Hold
REC ⁄=120
Quan
t
ize=off 4/4
REC ⁄=120
Quan
t
ize=Ö 4/4
Basic Techniques
Recording Your Performances
52
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Tempo
You can set the song tempo at which you wish to record your performance.
Quantize
Quantization is a function that corrects any small deviations in the timing of your
performance. The DTX502 can make recordings quantized based on a specified
note length. The available quantization settings are as follows.
When 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8, or 15/8 is set as the time signature:
á, , Ö, ÖA, Ü, ÜA, or off
When a time signature other than the above is set:
, A, Ö, ÖA, Ü, ÜA, or off
Example of how quantizing works
Time signature
You can also set the time signature for the metronome when recording.
1.
Press the [ ] button.
You will be counted in and recording will then start.
2.
To stop recording, press the [ ] button once again.
1.
Press the [ ] button.
2.
To stop playback, press the [ ] button once again.
Recording
Playing Back a Performance
NOTE
When quantization is set to “off, devi-
ations in the timing of your drumming
will not be corrected.
• These recorded notes were not played exactly in time.
• However, quantization can correct these small deviations in timing as follows.
Exactly on the beat
NOTE
If you would like to hear the metro-
nome as you record, be sure to turn it
on before you start recording.
REC Meas=001:01
Now recording...
NOTE
Yo u cannot record audio input via the
[AUX IN] jack.
Basic Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performances
53
Using the following procedure, you can freely assign a name to the User song you have recorded.
1.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the SONG1 page.
The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed.
2.
Change the displayed name as required.
Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and
then turn the Data Dial to change it.
3.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again.
To cancel the process without changing the song name, press the [ ] button.
4.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to save the new song
name.
Naming a User Song
NOTE
Preset songs cannot be renamed.
Songs containing no data (i.e.,
“EmptySng”) cannot be renamed.
SONG sa
V
e name
:[Un
t
i
t
led]
SONG sa
V
e name
:[tn
t
i
t
led]
SONG sa
V
e name
Are you sure?
Basic Techniques
Recording Your Performances
54
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
1.
Press the [SONG] button.
The SONG1 page will be displayed.
2.
Turn the data dial to select the song you wish to delete.
3.
Navigate to the SONG4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons.
4.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
To cancel the process without deleting the song, press the [ ] button.
5.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to delete the selected
song.
SONG4
Deleting a Recorded Performance
NOTE
Preset songs cannot be deleted.
SONG4 Clear
” Curren
t
Song
SONG4 Clear
Are you sure?
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
55
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
Menu Mode is used to customize drum-module parameters and functions, which are organized
into the following eight areas.
Menu Mode
01: Mixer Area: Mixer settings
MIXER Mixer settings........................................... Page 57
02: KitVoice Area: Settings affecting individual voices
KitV1 Layers ...................................................... Page 57
KitV2 Voices ...................................................... Page 58
KitV3 Volume..................................................... Page 59
KitV4 Tuning ...................................................... Page 59
KitV5 Stereo Panning ........................................ Page 59
KitV6 Decay....................................................... Page 59
KitV7 Cutoff Frequency...................................... Page 59
KitV8 MIDI Note Number................................... Page 60
KitV9 MIDI Channel........................................... Page 60
KitV10 MIDI Gate Time ....................................... Page 60
KitV11 Reverb Send (Source) ............................. Page 60
KitV12 Hold Mode ............................................... Page 61
KitV13 Alternate Group ....................................... Page 61
03: KitCommon Area: Settings affecting entire kits
KitC1 Double Bass Switch................................. Page 61
KitC2 Reverb Send (Voices) .............................. Page 61
KitC3 Reverb Type............................................. Page 62
KitC4 Reverb Return ......................................... Page 62
KitC5 Pad Control.............................................. Page 62
KitC6 Snare Adjustment .................................... Page 62
KitC7 Tempo...................................................... Page 62
KitC8 Trigger Setup Link.................................... Page 63
KitC9 MIDI Program Change ............................. Page 63
KitC10 MIDI Control Change ............................... Page 63
04: KitJob Area: Kit management
KitJ1 Copy Pad ................................................. Page 64
KitJ2 Clear User Kit .......................................... Page 65
05: Pad Area: Pad-related settings
Pad1 Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity.......................... Page 65
Pad2 Foot Close Position.................................. Page 65
Pad3 Pad Function............................................ Page 66
06: Trigger Area: Trigger-related settings
TRG1 Trigger Setup ........................................... Page 66
TRG2 Velocity Curve.......................................... Page 67
TRG3 Pad Type.................................................. Page 68
TRG4 Gain ......................................................... Page 68
TRG5 Minimum Level......................................... Page 68
TRG6 Minimum Velocity..................................... Page 69
TRG7 Reject Time.............................................. Page 69
TRG8 Wait Time................................................. Page 69
TRG9 Noise Filter............................................... Page 69
TRG10 Crosstalk.................................................. Page 70
TRG11 Crosstalk Pads......................................... Page 70
TRG12 Copy Trigger ............................................ Page 71
07: Training Area: Training-related settings
Trng1 Timer......................................................... Page 72
Trng2 Difficult
y Level ........................................... Page 72
Trng3 Ignore Timing ............................................ Page 72
Trng4 Pad Gate Group ........................................ Page 72
Trng5 Fast Blast Timer ........................................ Page 73
08: System Area: System settings
System1 Kit Lock............................................... Page 73
System2 Muted Volume..................................... Page 73
System3 Master Equalizer..................................Page 74
System4 Master Tuning ......................................Page 74
System5 Local Control .......................................Page 74
System6 Metronome Output...............................Page 74
System7 Number Display Function ....................Page 74
System8 Auto Power-Off.................................... Page 75
System9 Restore ............................................... Page 75
System10 Factory Set ......................................... Page 75
Advanced Techniques
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
56
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Use the following procedure in Menu Mode to select parameters
and change their settings.
1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/
ENTER] button to access Menu Mode.
2. Turn the Data Dial to select the area containing the parame-
ter you wish to set.
3. Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select the parameter.
4. Turn the Data Dial to change the parameter’s setting.
Parameter values from pages where an asterisk is not dis-
played are stored automatically.
Setting Procedure
NOTE
When a number of parameters are contained in a single page,
you can move the cursor between them using the [<]/[>] but-
tons.
Whenever you change a parameter setting in the Kit-
Voice area, the KitCommon area, the KitJob area, or on
one of pages TRG2 to TRG12 from the Trigger area, an
asterisk will be displayed after the page name (i.e.,
“TRG2*”). This is to remind you that parameters have
been changed but not yet stored. To store your settings,
follow the procedure described in the column on the
right. The asterisk will disappear when you store your
settings.
MENU
01:Mixer ‚
Hold
>Ki
t
V1 snareHd
Layer=s
t
ack ‚
>Ki
t
V1* snareHd
Layer=XFade1 ‚
NOTICE
Storing your settings
If you change a parameter setting in the KitVoice area, the Kit-
Common area, the KitJob area, or on one of pages TRG2 to
TRG12 from the Trigger area, you will need to store the new
setting in the drum module’s internal memory as described
below.
Procedure
As an example, the following describes how to store modified
trigger settings. Note that trigger settings are stored as part of
a User trigger setup. Meanwhile, settings from the KitVoice,
KitCommon, and KitJob areas are stored as part of one of the
User kits, which are numbered 51 to 100 (page 25).
1. After changing trigger parameter settings, press the
[SAVE/ENTER] button.
The page for storing trigger setup data will be displayed.
2. Turn the Data Dial to select the User trigger setup (15 to
30) in which you wish to store your settings.
3. To rename the trigger setup, move the cursor using the
[<]/[>] buttons and turn the Data Dial to change the
selected character.
4. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again.
Yo u will be asked to confirm that you wish to store your
settings.
5. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to store your settings.
To cancel the process without storing any settings, press
the [ ] button.
6. When your settings have been successfully stored, the
message “Completed.will be displayed.
NOTE
If you switch to another kit or trigger setup or turn off the drum
module without storing your new settings, the parameters in
question will revert to their previously stored settings.
tRG sa
V
e
t
o 15
:[DtX522K ]
tRG sa
V
e
t
o 16
:[DtX522K ]
tRG sa
V
e
t
o 16
Are you sure?
CAUTION
When you store trigger setup data, all of the data in
the selected trigger setup will be overwritten with
your new settings. Before proceeding, therefore,
you should ensure that the trigger setup in question
contains no irreplaceable settings.
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
57
The Mixer area is used to adjust the volumes of the various drum
kit voices.
MIXER Mixer settings
q Volume
Use the volume parameters to balance the input group* vol-
umes.
Input group indicators
H: Hi-hat sound volumes
S: Snare sound volumes
K: Kick sound volumes
T: Tom sound volumes
C: Cymbal sound volumes
R: Degree to which reverb is applied
Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select an input group, and then
turn the Data Dial to adjust its volume. Faders are displayed
above each of the input-group indicators to give a general
idea of the current volume balance. The reverb (R) setting
applies to all of the drum kit’s voices.
The KitVoice area is used to set drum voices for individual trigger
input sources.
KitV1
Layers
q Trigger input source
This item indicates the trigger input source currently selected
for editing. Trigger input sources can be selected by striking
the corresponding pad or zone. This selection applies to both
Layer A and Layer B. (Trigger input sources are not dis-
played individually for each layer.)
01: Mixer Area
Mixer settings
NOTE
*: Input groups
Voices are organized into input groups based on their voice
category. For example, when you change the T setting (tom
sound volumes), the volume of all sounds from the Tom (T)
voice category will change accordingly.
Settings
0 to 16
>MIXER ÏÏÏÏÏÈ
” Kick=16 HSKtCR
q
02: KitVoice Area
Settings affecting individual voices
NOTE
Yo u can also select trigger input sources by holding down the
[SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
Settings
snareHd, snareOp, snareCl, snrOfHd,
snrOfOp, snrOfCl, tom1Hd, tom2Hd, tom3Hd,
rideBw, rideEg, rideCp, crashBw, crashEg,
crashCp, kick, pad8, hhOpBw, hhOpEg,
hhOpCp, hhClBw, hhClEg, hhClCp, hhFtCl,
hhSplsh, pad10, pad11, pad12, and kick2
For details on the correspondence between
trigger input jacks and trigger input sources,
refer to page 29.
>Ki
t
V1 snareHd
Layer=s
t
ack ‚
q
w
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
58
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
w Layer
Use this parameter to specify how the voices are to be
arranged in the two layers (A and B) for the specified trigger
input source.
KitV2
Voices
q Trigger input source
This item indicates the trigger input source currently selected
for editing. Trigger input sources can be selected by striking
the corresponding pad or zone. To switch between Layer A
and Layer B, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the
[<] or [>] button accordingly.
w Voice category
Use this parameter to set the category from which a voice will
be assigned to the selected layer.
Settings Description
off
Layer B is turned off and only the voice from
Layer A produces a sound.
stack
The voices from Layer A and Layer B produce
sounds at the same velocity over the entire
velocity range.
Using the settings “XFade1” to “XFade9”, you can crossfade
the velocities of Layer A and Layer B in various different ways
as shown below.
XFade1
XFade2
XFade3
XFade4
XFade5
XFade6
XFade7
XFade8
XFade9
VelSw***
The two voices are layered at the velocity indi-
cated in the setting value. For example, with a
setting of “VelSw60”, the voice from Layer A
would produce a sound at velocities from 1 to
59, and the voice from Layer B would produce
a sound at velocities from 60 to 127.
NOTE
Yo u can also select trigger input sources by holding down the
[SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
Settings
snareHd, snareOp, snareCl, snrOfHd,
snrOfOp, snrOfCl, tom1Hd, tom2Hd, tom3Hd,
rideBw, rideEg, rideCp, crashBw, crashEg,
crashCp, kick, pad8, hhOpBw, hhOpEg,
hhOpCp, hhClBw, hhClEg, hhClCp, hhFtCl,
hhSplsh, pad10, pad11, pad12, and kick2
For details on the correspondence between
trigger input jacks and trigger input sources,
refer to page 29.
Settings Description
KKick
S Snare
TTom
CCymbal
HHi-hat
PPercussion
EEffect
WWave Voice
(*1)
e Pad Song
(*2)
NOTE
*1: Wave voices
A wave voice is an audio file containing, for example, an
instrument sound, an effect sound, or a sampled phrase.
These .WAV format files can be transferred from a computer
to your drum module and used as voices for pads. See page
79 for instructions on how to transfer them to the drum mod-
ule.
*2: Pad Song
Using the Pad Song function, you can play one of the drum
module’s internal songs simply by striking a pad. In the same
way as regular voices, these songs can be assigned to indi-
vidual pad layers. The Pad Song function can play up to three
songs simultaneously. In addition, when you have selected
Pad Song as the voice category, you can also set the song’s
Repeat and Play modes as shown below (page 30).
>Ki
t
V2 snareHd˙
S01:MapleCus
t
m‚
q
w e
>Ki
t
V2* snareHd˙
”Ö39:Funk C ≥‚
Repeat mode Play mode
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
59
e Voice Number: Voice Name
Use the Voice Number parameter to choose a voice from the
selected category.
KitV3
Volume
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w Volume
Use this parameter to set the volume of the voice assigned to
the selected layer.
KitV4
Tuning
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w Tune
Use this parameter to set the tuning of the voice assigned to
the selected layer.
KitV5
Stereo Panning
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w Pan
Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the voice
assigned to the selected layer.
KitV6
Decay
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w Decay
The amount of time it takes a voice to fade away to silence is
referred to as its “decay”. Use this parameter to set the decay
for the voice assigned to the selected layer. Positive values
produce shorter decay times and crisper sounds.
KitV7
Cutoff Frequency
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w CutOffFreq
Use this parameter to set the filter cutoff frequency for the
voice assigned to the selected layer. Negative values produce
darker sounds and vice-versa.
Settings
The number of available voices varies
depending on the selected category. For
details on the voices in each, refer to the
Voice List (page 85).
NOTE
When “00:NoAssign” is selected as the voice, the layer in ques-
tion will not produce any sound.
Settings
0 to 127
Settings
–24.0 to +24.0 (in 10-cent steps)
NOTE
This setting has no effect when Pad Song ( e ) is selected as the
voice category.
>Ki
t
V3 snareHd˙
” Volume=127 ‚
q
w
>Ki
t
V4 snareHd˙
” tune=+ 0.0 ‚
q
w
Settings
L64 to C to R63
Settings
–64 to 0 to +63
Settings
–64 to 0 to +63
>Ki
t
V5 snareHd˙
” Pan= C ‚
q
w
>Ki
t
V6 snareHd˙
” Decay=+ 0 ‚
q
w
>Ki
t
V7 snareHd˙
”Cu
t
OffFreq=+ 0‚
q
w
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
60
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
KitV8 MIDI Note Number
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w Note
Use this parameter to set the MIDI note number that is output
whenever a trigger signal is received from the selected trigger
input source. Settings can be made individually for Layer A
and Layer B, meaning that two MIDI notes with different
note numbers can be output simultaneously in response to a
single trigger signal. Settings are displayed as “Note number /
Note name”.
KitV9
MIDI Channel
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w MIDI Ch
Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which notes
are output whenever a trigger signal is received from the
selected trigger input source. Settings can be made individu-
ally for Layer A and Layer B.
KitV10
MIDI Gate Time
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2
page.
w GateTime
The time that passes between the output of a MIDI Note On
message and the corresponding Note Off message is referred
to as the “gate time”. Use this parameter to set the gate time
for notes output whenever a trigger signal is received from
the selected trigger input source. Settings can be made indi-
vidually for Layer A and Layer B.
KitV11
Reverb Send (Source)
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1
page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A
and Layer B.
w RevSend
Use this parameter to specify how much reverb is to be
applied to voices produced by the specified trigger input
source.
Settings
0/C-2 to 127/G 8
NOTE
Layer B will not produce any MIDI notes when the Layer parame-
ter from the KitV1 page is set to “off.
Settings
1 to 16
>Ki
t
V8 snareHd˙
”No
t
e= 38/D 1 ‚
q
w
>Ki
t
V9 snareHd˙
” MIDI Ch=10 ‚
q
w
Settings
0.0s to 9.9s
Settings
0 to 127
>Ki
t
V10 snareHd˙
”Ga
t
etime=0.3s ‚
q
w
>Ki
t
V11 snareHd
” Re
V
Send= 40 ‚
w
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
61
KitV12 Hold Mode
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1
page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A
and Layer B.
w HoldMode
Use this parameter to turn Hold mode on or off for voices
produced by the specified trigger input source.
KitV13
Alternate Group
q Trigger input source
See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1
page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A
and Layer B.
w AltGrp
Use this parameter to assign the voices produced by the spec-
ified trigger input source to an alternate group—that is, a col-
lection of voices that you do not want to play simultaneously,
such as open and closed hi-hats. If a voice is triggered while
another from the same alternate group is already playing, the
earlier voice will be silenced before the new one is played.
The KitCommon area is used to set parameters that apply to the
current kit.
KitC1
Double Bass Switch
q DblBass
By setting this parameter to “on”, you can easily configure
your drum module to produce a kick drum sound whenever
you operate the pedal connected to the [HI-HAT CONTROL]
trigger input jack. This convenient function provides support
for double bass drumming techniques.
KitC2
Reverb Send (Voices)
q RevSendDr
Use this parameter to specify the level at which all of the cur-
rent kit’s drum voices are to be sent to the built-in reverb unit.
Settings Description
on
MIDI Note On and Note Off messages are
output alternately whenever the pad is struck.
Note that when Wave Voice (W) has been
specified as the voice category, the Wave
Voice will be played repeatedly.
off
This setting corresponds to normal operation:
A MIDI Note On message is output when the
pad is struck, and the corresponding MIDI
Note Off message is output automatically after
the gate time has elapsed.
Settings Description
off Voice is not assigned to an alternate group
HHOpen Open Hi-hat group
HHClose Closed Hi-hat group
1 to 9
Numbered alternate groups: Voices that you
do not want to play simultaneously can be
freely assigned to them.
NOTE
The Open Hi-hat group and the Closed Hi-hat group operate
according to the following rules.
When a voice from the Open Hi-hat group is triggered, other
voices from that group and those from the Closed Hi-hat
group are not silenced.
When a voice from the Closed Hi-hat group is triggered, all
voices from the Open Hi-Hat group are silenced.
>Ki
t
V12 snareHd
” HoldMode=off ‚
w
q
>Ki
t
V13 snareHd
” Al
t
Grp=off
w
q
03: KitCommon Area
Settings affecting entire kits
Settings
off or on
NOTE
Opening and closing of the hi-hat is not possible when DblBass
is set to “on.
Settings
0 to 127
NOTE
The RevSendDr parameter affects all of the current kit’s drum
voices. To adjust the reverb level for individual pads or trigger
input sources, use the Reverb Send (Source) parameter
(RevSend) from the KitVoice area (page 60).
>Ki
t
C1
” DblBass=off ‚
q
>Ki
t
C2
” Re
V
SendDr= 60‚
q
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
62
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
KitC3 Reverb Type
q RevType
Use this parameter to select the type of reverb to be applied.
KitC4
Reverb Return
q RevMastRet
Use this parameter to set the reverb unit’s return level.
KitC5
Pad Control
q PadCtl
When a pad unit equipped with a pad controller is connected
to the [qSNARE] jack, this parameter can be used to select a
function for the controller.
KitC6
Snare Adjustment
q Snares
Use this parameter to adjust the snare-wire tension for the pad
connected to the [qSNARE] jack. An “off” setting simulates
the snare wires being fully removed from the head.
KitC7
Tempo
q Tempo
Use this parameter to specify the tempo to be set automati-
cally upon selection of the current drum kit. When set to
“off”, the tempo will not change automatically when the cur-
rent kit is selected.
Settings
none, hall1, hall2, hall3, room1, room2,
room3, stage1, stage2, plate
Settings
0 to 127
NOTE
The reverb return level can be adjusted to balance the volumes
of the sounds with reverb applied and those without.
>Ki
t
C3
”Re
V
type=hall1 ‚
q
>Ki
t
C4
”Re
V
Mas
t
Re
t
= 64‚
q
Settings Description
off Pad controller performs no function.
snares
Adjustment of snare-wire tension (also affect-
ing open-rim sounds)
tuning
Adjustment of tuning (also affecting open-rim
sounds)
tempo Adjustment of the tempo
Settings Description
off Snare wires fully removed
1 to 24
Higher values correspond to tighter snare
wires and vice-versa.
Settings
off, 30 to 300
>Ki
t
C5
PacC
t
l=snares ‚
q
>Ki
t
C6
” Snares= 4 ‚
q
>Ki
t
C7
” tempo=off ‚
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
63
KitC8 Trigger Setup Link
q TrgSetupLk
Use this parameter to assign a trigger setup to the currently
selected kit. Select “off” if the kit does not need a specific
trigger setup.
KitC9
MIDI Program Change
On the MIDI Program Change page, you can specify the MIDI
Program Change number to be sent when the current kit is
selected, in addition to the corresponding Bank Select MSB and
LSB messages.
q MIDI channel (Ch)
Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which to send
the Program Change messages.
w Program-change output switch
Use this parameter to turn the output of Program Change
messages on or off.
e Program change number
Use this parameter to set the Program Change number to be
sent.
r Bank Select MSB
t Bank Select LSB
KitC10
MIDI Control Change
On the MIDI Control Change page, you can set values for MIDI
Control Change volume and pan messages to be sent when the
current kit is selected.
q MIDI channel (Ch)
Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which to send
the Control Change messages.
w Control Change output switch
Use this parameter to turn the output of Control Change mes-
sages on or off.
e Vo lume
Use this parameter to set a value for the Control Change vol-
ume message.
r Pan
Use this parameter to set a value for the Control Change pan
message.
Settings
off, 01 to 30
NOTE
By sending MIDI Program Change messages, you can have the MIDI
instrument automatically change its voice when you select the cur-
rent kit.
Settings
1 to 16
Settings
off or on
Settings
001 to 128
Settings
000 to 127
NOTE
In order to set the Bank Select MSB and LSB parameters cor-
rectly, you will need to refer to the MIDI instrument’s Voice List
and MIDI Data Format.
>Ki
t
C8
trgSe
t
upLk=off‚
q
>Ki
t
C9 Ch1=off
PC001 M000L000‚
te r
q
w
NOTE
By sending these MIDI Control Change messages, you can have the
MIDI instrument connected via the MIDI OUT connector automati-
cally set its volume and stereo panning when you select the current
kit.
Settings
1 to 16
Settings
off or on
Settings
0 to 127
Settings
L64 to C to R63
>Ki
t
C10 Ch1=off
Vol=100 Pan= C
e r
q
w
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
64
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
KitJ1 Copy Pad
On the Copy Pad page, you can copy all settings for a specific pad
into the current kit from another.
1. Navigate to the Copy Pad page and set both the kit to copy
from and the pad to be copied.
2. Move the cursor and set the destination pad (from the current
kit).
3. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
You will be asked to confirm that you wish to copy the pad.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to copy the pad.
To cancel the process without copying any data, press the
[ ] button.
4. When the pad has been successfully copied, the message
“Completed.” will be displayed.
04: KitJob Area
Kit management
When you copy a pad using the procedure described below,
the current kit’s settings will be modified but not saved (i.e.,
the asterisk (*) will be displayed). To make the change per-
manent, be sure to save your settings (page 25). If you select
another kit or turn off the drum module without doing so, the
kit will revert to its original settings.
NOTE
When the pad name is flashing, you can also select a different
one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and
pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
NOTE
When the destination pad is flashing, you can also select a dif-
ferent one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button
and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
>Ki
t
J1 CopyPad
01:Snare≥Snare‚
NOTICE
>Ki
t
J1 CopyPad
02:Snare≥Snare‚
Number of kit to copy from: Pad to be copied
>Ki
t
J1 CopyPad
02:tom1≥tom2 ‚
Destination pad
CAUTION
Whenever a pad is copied, all of the destination pad’s
settings will be overwritten with those of the copied
pad. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure
that the destination pad contains no irreplaceable set-
tings.
>Ki
t
J1 CopyPad
Are you sure?
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
65
KitJ2 Clear User Kit
On the Clear User Kit page, you can restore a User kit to its
default settings.
1. Navigate to the Clear User Kit page and specify which of the
User kits (numbered 51 to 100) is to be cleared.
2. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
You will be asked to confirm that you wish to clear the User
kit.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to clear the
User kit. To cancel the process without clearing any settings,
press the [ ] button.
3. When the User kit has been successfully cleared, the mes-
sage “Completed.” will be displayed.
Pad1
Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity
q Splash
Use this parameter to set the degree of sensitivity for detect-
ing hi-hat foot splashes. The higher the value, the easier it
will be to produce a foot-splash sound with the hi-hat control-
ler. High values may, however, result in splash sounds being
unintentionally produced when, for example, you operate the
hi-hat controller lightly as you keep time. It is a good idea to
set this parameter to “off” if you do not want to play foot
splashes.
Pad2
Foot Close Position
q ClosePos
Use this parameter to adjust the position at which the hi-hat
switches from open to closed when the hi-hat controller is
depressed. The lower the value, the smaller the virtual open-
ing between the top and bottom hi-hats.
CAUTION
When a User kit is cleared, all of its settings will be
returned to their default conditions. Before proceeding,
therefore, you should ensure that the User kit in ques-
tion contains no irreplaceable settings.
>Ki
t
J2 Clear
51:User Ki
t
>Ki
t
J2 Clear
51:User Ki
t
User kit number
>Ki
t
J2 Clear
Are you sure?
05: Pad Area
Pad-related settings
Settings
off, 1 to 127
Settings
0 to 32
>Pad1
” Splash= 30 ‚
q
>Pad2
” ClosePos=28 ‚
q
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
66
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Pad3 Pad Function
q Trigger input
This item indicates the trigger input source to which a func-
tion is to be assigned. Trigger input sources can be selected
by striking the corresponding pad or zone.
w Func
Pad Function allows control panel operations and the like to
be performed by striking the specified pad or zone. Use this
parameter to select the function to be performed.
TRG1
Trigger Setup
q Trigger setup
Use this parameter to select a trigger setup.
NOTE
Yo u can also select trigger input sources by holding down the
[SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
Settings Description
off Voices will be played in the normal way.
inc kitNo Increase the kit number by 1
dec kitNo Decrease the kit number by 1
inc songNo Increase the song number by 1
dec songNo Decrease the song number by 1
inc clkNo Increase the Click Set by 1
dec clkNo Decrease the Click Set by 1
inc tempo Increase the tempo by 1 BPM
dec tempo Decrease the tempo by 1 BPM
tap tempo Tap a new tempo (page 36)
clkOn/Off Turn the metronome on or off
song>
Start or stop an external song
clk&song>
Turn the metronome on or off and simulta-
neously start or stop an external song (syn-
chronized with the metronome)
doubleBass
Turn the Double Bass Switch on or off (page
61)
NOTE
Pad Function cannot be used when in Training Mode.
>Pad3 snareHd
Func=off
w
q
06: Trigger Area
Trigger-related settings
Settings
01: DTX522K, 02: DTX532K, 03: DTX542K,
04: DTX562K, 05: DTX500K, 06: DTX520K,
07: DTX530K, 08: DTX540K, 09: DTX550K,
10: DTX560K, 11: DTXP4STD (DTXPRESS
IV STD SET), 12: DTXP4SP (DTXPRESS IV
SP SET), 13: DTXPL (DTXPLORER),
14: DrumTrig, and 15–30: UserTrig
NOTE
The most appropriate trigger setup for your electronic drum kit
will be automatically selected during the Initial Setup process
(page 13). For this reason, it is usually not necessary to change
the setting on this page. However, you may decide to edit trigger
parameters after making detailed changes to the settings of indi-
vidual pads in order, for example, to add another pad or to elimi-
nate crosstalk. In such a case, you should store your settings in
a User trigger setup (numbered 15 to 30) as described below.
>tRG1 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
01:DtX522K ‚
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
67
TRG2 Velocity Curve
q Trigger input
This item indicates the pad to be edited. If necessary, strike a
different pad to select it.
w VelCurve
Use this parameter to select a velocity curve for the selected
pad. A velocity curve determines how the velocity (or power)
of the sound is affected by how hard you strike the pad.
NOTE
The percentage value at the top-right of the screen indicates
the trigger input level when the pad is struck.
•You can also select a pad by holding down the [SHIFT] button
and pressing the [< ]/[>] buttons.
Settings
Snare, Tom1, Tom2, Tom3, Ride, Crash, Kick,
Pad8, Hihat, Pad10, Pad11, and Pad12
Settings
loud2, loud1, norm, hard1, hard2, Fix1 to Fix5,
Spl11 to Spl15, Spl21 to Spl25, and ofs1 to
ofs5
>tRG2 Snare 00%
VelCur
V
e=norm ‚
w
q
loud2
loud1
norm
hard1
hard2
Fix1
Fix2
Fix3
Fix4
Fix5
Trigger input level
Velocity
Trigger input level
Velocit y
ofs3
ofs4
ofs5
ofs2
ofs1
Spl12
Spl11
Spl13
Spl14
Spl15
Spl22
Spl21
Spl23
Spl24
Spl25
Trigger input level
Velocit y
Trigger input level
Velocit y
Trigger input level
Velocity
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
68
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
TRG3 Pad Type
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w Pad Type
Use this parameter to specify a type for the selected pad.
TRG4
Gain
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w Gain
Use this parameter to set the level of gain (or amplification)
applied to trigger input signals from the selected pad. The
higher the gain setting, the louder the sounds produced by
light drumming.
TRG5
Minimum Level
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w MinLevel
Use this parameter to set the minimum level of trigger signal
that must be received at the selected pad in order for a sound
to be produced.
Settings
– – OFF
KK KP125W/125, KP65, or KU100
SN
XP120/100, XP80, XP70, TP120SD/100,
TP70S/70, or TP65S/65
TM
XP120/100, XP80, XP70, TP120SD/100,
TP70S/70, or TP65S/65
CY
PCY155, PCY150S, PCY135, PCY130SC,
PCY130S/130, PCY100, PCY90, or PCY65S/65
HH RHH135, RHH130, PCY100, PCY90, or TP65S/65
DT
DT10/20SN (for snare drums), DT10/20tomH (for
high toms), DT10/20tomL (for low toms), DT10/
20kick (for kick drums), or misc1 to misc4 (for non-
Yamaha pads)
2P
For dual piezo pads
*: Only selectable when the input source q is
Tom1, Tom2, or Kick.
*: Balance settings can be made for the two piezos
(H49 to H1, 0, or R1 to R49). If, for example, a
dual piezo pad was connected to the [wTOM1/
!0] jack, Tom 1 would be the head (H) and Pad
10 would be the rim (R). If the head sounds
when the rim is struck, move the balance further
to the R side to ensure that the rim sounds
instead. Similarly, if the rim sounds when the
head is struck, move the balance further to the H
side.
>tRG3 Snare 00%
SN:XP80 ‚
w
q
Settings
1 to 127
Settings
0 to 99 (%)
>tRG4 Snare 00%
” Gain= 1 ‚
w
q
>tRG5 Snare 00%
” MinLe
V
el= 1% ‚
w
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
69
TRG6 Minimum Velocity
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w MinVel
Use this parameter to specify the velocity (or volume) of
sounds produced by trigger signals at the minimum level set
on the Minimum Level page (TRG5).
TRG7
Reject Time
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w RejTime
Trigger inputs can be set to accept only the first of a number
of trigger signals arriving very close together. Use this param-
eter to set the reject time for the selected pad—that is, how
long it will wait after accepting one trigger signal before
accepting another. In this way, you can prevent a rebounding
stick or beater from producing more than one sound (i.e.,
double triggering).
TRG8
Wait Time
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w WaitTime
Use this parameter to specify how long the selected pad will
wait before detecting a trigger signal. By adjusting this time
to ensure that trigger signals are detected at their peak levels,
you can ensure that the volume of sounds produced accu-
rately reflects the strength of playing.
TRG9
Noise Filter
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w NoiseFilter
Any noise contained in trigger signals can cause sounds to be
produced unintentionally. Use this parameter to filter out such
noise. Larger values correspond to a higher level of filtering.
Settings
0 to 126
Settings
4 to 500 (ms)
>tRG6 Snare 00%
” MinVel= 1 ‚
w
q
>tRG7 Snare 00%
Rejtime= 5ms ‚
w
q
Settings
1 to 64 (ms)
Settings
1 to 10
NOTE
Larger noise filter settings can, in cases where the pad is struck
multiple times in rapid succession, result in sounds being
dropped. Be sure to adjust the setting to best match your style of
drumming.
>tRG8 Snare 00%
Wai
t
time= 4ms ‚
w
q
>tRG9 Snare 00%
NoiseFil
t
er= 5‚
w
q
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
70
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
TRG10 Crosstalk
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w Crosstalk
The term “crosstalk” refers to the output of spurious trigger
signals from a pad other than the one that was struck as a
result of vibration or interference between pads. Use this
parameter to specify a level for preventing crosstalk from the
pads set on the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11). If the level of
the trigger signal from the pad indicated by q is lower than
this level whenever one of those pads is struck, it will be
treated as crosstalk and no sound will be produced. Although
higher setting values are more effective in preventing cross-
talk, they can also make it difficult to play softly on multiple
pads at the same time.
TRG11
Crosstalk Pads
q Trigger input
See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page.
w Crosstalk pads
Use these parameters to select (
) the pads that tend to pro-
duce crosstalk in the pad indicated by q. The setting from
the Crosstalk page (TRG10) will apply to these pads. No
crosstalk elimination is performed for unselected pads (
).
Settings
0 to 99
Settings
Sn (Snare), T1 (Tom1), T2 (Tom2), T3 (Tom3),
Ri (Ride), Cr (Crash), KK (Kick), P8 (Pad8),
HH (HiHat), P10 (Pad10), P11 (Pad11), and
P12 (Pad12)
>tRG10 Snare 00%
” Cross
t
alk=35 ‚
w
q
”P
:
=
K
P
;
=
K
P
<
=
K
KK=
L
P8=
K
HH=
K
t3=
L
Ri=
L
Cr=
K
>tRG11 Snare 00%
Sn=
K
t1=
L
t2=
L
w
q
Eliminating Crosstalk
The following example shows how crosstalk could be
eliminated if snare sounds were unintentionally pro-
duced when toms 1 and 2 were played.
1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/
ENTER] button to access Menu Mode. Select the
Trigger area (06:Trigger) and navigate to the Cross-
talk page (TRG10).
2. Strike the snare pad to select it for crosstalk elimi-
nation.
3. Move to the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11) using the
[<]/[>] button and select (
) T1 and T2 as the
pads causing crosstalk in the snare. The setting
made in Step 4 below will now be applied to trig-
ger signals from pads T1 and T2.
4. Move back to the Crosstalk page (TRG10) using the
[<] button. Play pads T1 and T2 to determine the
level of trigger signal they produce in the snare,
and set the Crosstalk parameter to this level.
5. Verify that pads T1 and T2 no longer produce
crosstalk in the snare. If necessary, store your set-
tings (page 56).
>tRG10 Snare 00%
” Cross
t
alk=35 ‚
>tRG10 Snare 00%
” Cross
t
alk=35 ‚
Pad triggered by crosstalk
>tRG10 Snare 00%
Sn=
K
t1=
L
t2=
L
Pads causing crosstalk
>tRG10 Snare 00%
” Cross
t
alk=60 ‚
Level at which crosstalk does not occur
Tip
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
71
TRG12 Copy Trigger
On the Copy Trigger page, you can copy all settings for a specific
pad into the current trigger setup from another.
1. Navigate to the Copy Trigger page and set both the trigger
setup to copy from and the pad to be copied.
2. Move the cursor and set the destination pad (from the current
drum trigger).
3. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button.
You will be asked to confirm that you wish to copy the pad.
Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to copy the pad.
To cancel the process without copying any data, press the
[ ] button.
4. When the pad has been successfully copied, the message
“Completed.” will be displayed.
When you copy pad settings using the procedure described
below, the current trigger setup’s settings will be modified
but not stored (i.e., the asterisk (*) will be displayed). To
make the change permanent, be sure to store your settings
(page 56). If you select another kit or turn off the drum mod-
ule without doing so, the trigger setup will revert to its origi-
nal settings.
NOTE
When the pad name is flashing, you can also select a different
one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and
pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
NOTE
When the destination pad is flashing, you can also select a dif-
ferent one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button
and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons.
>tRG12 CopyPad
” 1:Snare≥Snare
NOTICE
>tRG12 CopyPad
” 1:Snare≥Snare
Number of trigger setup to copy from: Pad to be copied
>tRG12 CopyPad
” 2:tom1≥tom2
Destination pad
CAUTION
Whenever a pad is copied, all of the destination pad’s
settings will be overwritten with those of the copied
pad. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure
that the destination pad contains no irreplaceable set-
tings.
>tRG12 CopyPad
Are you sure?
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
72
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
The Training area is used to set training-function parameters.
Trng1
Timer
q Timer
Use this parameter to set the practice timer used in Training
Mode. The timer is started at the beginning of practice, and
when it reaches the set time, the practice session will end
automatically.
Trng2
Difficulty Level
q Difficulty
Use this parameter to set the training difficulty level. The
larger the setting, the more difficult the training.
Trng3
Ignore Timing
q IgnrTiming
Use this parameter to specify whether or not the pads are to
produce sounds when played out of time. When set to “on”,
they will always produce a sound.
Trng4
Pad Gate Group
q Group
Use this parameter to set which groups of pads the drum
module should consider when deciding whether or not you
are playing the songs drum pattern correctly in Pad Gate
training (page 46).
07: Training Area
Training-related settings
Settings
off, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s, 300s,
480s, and 600s
NOTE
The above setting applies only to the following types of training.
•Groove Check
•Rhythm Gate
•Measure Break
Tempo Up/Down
Change Up
•Pad Gate
Settings
1 to 5
NOTE
The above setting applies only to the following types of training.
Tempo Up/Down
Change Up
•Pad Gate
>trng1
” timer=off ‚
q
>trng2
” Difficul
t
y=3 ‚
q
Settings
off or on
NOTE
The above setting applies only to the following types of training.
Tempo Up/Down
Change Up
•Pad Gate
Settings Description
all pads
Any pad will be scored, as long as the timing
of your drumming is correct.
group1
The kit is separated into five groups—kick,
snare, toms, cymbals, and hi-hat. In order
for your drumming to be scored, you must
strike pads from the same group as those
from the practice drum pattern and do so in
time.
group2
Similar to “group 1”, but all toms and cym-
bals are treated separately. In addition, the
hi-hat pad and the hi-hat controller are also
divided into separate groups.
all note
With this setting, you must play the drum
pattern exactly as it is in the song.
NOTE
The above setting applies only to Pad Gate training.
>trng3
Ignrtiming=off‚
q
>trng4
Group=group1 ‚
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
73
Trng5 Fast Blast Timer
q BlastTimer
Use this parameter to set the practice time for Fast Blast train-
ing (page 49). The timer is started at the beginning of prac-
tice, and when it reaches the set time, the practice session will
end automatically.
The System area is used to configure the drum module’s system
and also to set parameters that affect all kits and songs.
System1
Kit Lock
q KitLock
By default, the drum module automatically chooses the most
appropriate drum kit whenever you select a different song.
Set the KitLock parameter to “on” if you would like the cur-
rent kit to be retained when changing songs.
System2
Muted Volume
q DrumMuteVol
Use this parameter to set the volume of the drum parts when
muted with [DRUM MUTE].
Settings
10s, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s, 300s,
480s, and 600s
NOTE
The above setting applies only to Fast Blast training.
>trng5
Blas
t
timer= 10s
q
08: System Area
System settings
Settings
off or on
NOTE
Regardless of the KitLock setting, you can change kits freely
using the control panel.
Settings
0 to 10
NOTE
When DrumMuteVol is set to “0”, the drum parts will be totally
silent when muted.
>Sys
t
em1
” Ki
t
Lock=off ‚
q
>Sys
t
em2
DrumMu
t
eVol= 0‚
q
Advanced Techniques
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
74
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
System3 Master Equalizer
q Lo
The drum module features a two-band shelving equalizer as
its master EQ. Use this parameter to set the equalizer’s low-
end gain in dB. The higher the value, the more the low end
will be boosted.
w Hi
Use this parameter to set the master equalizer’s high-end gain
in dB. The higher the value, the more the high end will be
boosted.
System4
Master Tuning
q Tune
Use this parameter to set the tuning for songs in steps of one
cent.
System5
Local Control
q LocalCtrl
Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) playing
of the internal tone generator using the pads and songs. When
set to “off”, the tone generator is essentially disconnected
from the pads and controllers, which will be unable to gener-
ate any sound.
System6
Metronome Output
q OutSel
Use this parameter to specify where metronome sounds are to
be output.
System7
Number Display Function
q Disp
Use this parameter to specify what is to be shown by the
number display.
Settings
0 to +12
Settings
0 to +12
Settings
-100 to +100
NOTE
The above parameter has no effect on drum kit sounds.
Settings
off or on
>Sys
t
em3 MEQ
Lo=+ 2 Hi=+ 2 ‚
wq
>Sys
t
em4 Mtune
” tune=+ 0 ‚
q
>Sys
t
em5
LocalC
t
rl=on ‚
q
Settings Description
mix
The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT [L/
MONO] and [R] jacks.
clickL
The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT [L/
MONO] jack only; drum and song sounds
are output in mono via the OUTPUT [R]
jack.
clickR
The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT
[R] jack only; drum and song sounds are
output in mono via the OUTPUT [L/MONO]
jack.
NOTE
The above setting also applies to output from the [PHONES]
jack.
Settings Description
tempo Current tempo
mode
Mode-specific content as follows.
Kit area: Kit number
Training Mode: Current tempo
Song area: Song number
Recording: Current tempo
Metronome area: Click Set number
(current tempo on Tap Tempo page
only)
•Menu Mode: No display (trigger setup
number in Trigger area only)
All other times: No display
timer
Metronome timer. Training timer when in
Training Mode.
NOTE
In cases where the above parameter is not set to “tempo”, the
number display will show the tempo for several seconds after it is
changed by one of the following actions.
•Turning the Data Dial with the [SHIFT] button held down
Operating a pad controller whose function has been set to
“tempo” (page 62)
Striking a pad whose pad function has been set to “inc
tempo, “dec tempo”, or “tap tempo” (page 66)
>Sys
t
em6 Click
”Ou
t
Sel=mix ‚
q
>Sys
t
em7 LED
” Disp=
t
empo ‚
q
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Setting Parameters using Menu Mode
75
System8 Auto Power-Off
q AutoPwrOff
Use this parameter to set the time until the Auto Power-Off
function activates (page 13) or to disable (“off”) this function.
System9
Restore
Using the Restore function as described below, you can return all
User data (i.e., kits, click sets, trigger setups, and songs) to the
settings they had when you last turned on the drum module.
1. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the Restore page.
You will be asked to confirm that you wish to proceed.
To cancel the Restore process, press the [ ] button.
2. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to reset the parameters.
3. When the parameters have been successfully reset, the mes-
sage “Completed.” will be displayed.
4. The drum module will automatically restart.
System10
Factory Set
Using the procedure described below, you can return all User data
(i.e., kits, click sets, trigger setups, and songs) to the default set-
tings.
1. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the Factory Set page.
You will be asked to confirm that you wish to proceed.
To cancel the process without restoring default settings,
press the [ ] button.
2. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to reset the parameters.
3. When the parameters have been successfully reset, the mes-
sage “Completed.will be displayed.
4. When the Factory Set has been restored, the drum module
will automatically restart and the Initial Setup page will be
displayed (page 13).
Settings
off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, and 120 (min)
NOTE
Settings for the Auto Power-Off function do not represent exact
times and there may be some variation.
The drum module automatically stores its system settings
before turning off automatically.
CAUTION
When you reset parameters using the Restore function, any
changes you have made to them since last turning on the
drum module will be lost. Before proceeding, therefore, you
should ensure that these parameters contain no irreplace-
able settings.
>Sys
t
em8
Au
t
oPwrOff=30 ‚
q
>Sys
t
em9
Res
t
ore ‚
>Sys
t
em9 Res
t
ore
Are you sure?
CAUTION
When you reset parameters as described below, any
changes you have made to them will be lost. Before proceed-
ing, therefore, you should ensure that they contain no irre-
placeable settings.
NOTE
Yo u can also restore the Factory Set by turning on the drum
module with both the [<] and [>] buttons held down (page 14)
>Sys
t
em
:
” Fac
t
ory Se
t
>Sys
t
em
:
Fac
t
Se
t
Are you sure?
>Sys
t
em
:
Fac
t
Se
t
Execu
t
ing...
Advanced Techniques
76
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Integrating Separately Sold Accessories
You can also expand your electronic drum kit with various accessories* for an even more
enjoyable drumming experience. (*: Sold separately)
1. Turn off the drum module.
2. Assemble the PCY90AT to your drum kit. Using the cable
that came with the PCY90AT, connect it to the [PAD>IN]
jack on the KP65 Kick Pad.
3. Connect the [OUT>DTX] jack on the KP65 to the
[uKICK/i] trigger input jack on the drum module.
4. Turn on the drum module.
5. Choose the correct pad type for the PCY90AT.
For details on how to do so, see the description of the Pad
Type page from Menu Mode (page 68). Specifically, you
should set “Pad8” as the trigger input and set the Pad Type
parameter to “PCY90”.
By connecting a KU100 Kick Unit as described below, you can
add a compact, quiet-type kick pedal to your electronic drum kit.
1. Turn off the drum module.
2. Plug one end of the cable that came with the KU100 into its
[OUTPUT] jack.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into the drum module’s
[uKICK/i] trigger input jack.
4. Turn on the drum module.
5. Choose the correct pad type for the KU100.
For details on how to do so, see the description of the Pad
Type page from Menu Mode (page 68). Specifically, you
should set “Kick” as the trigger input and set the Pad Type
parameter to “KU100”.
The following describes how to add a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad and a KU100 Kick Unit. If adding a different acces-
sory, be sure to read the description of the Pad Type page from Menu Mode (page 68).
Adding a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad
NOTE
The PCY90AT Cymbal Pad can also be connected to the
[wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1], or [rTOM3/!2] jack. In order to do
so, you will need a Y cable (sold separately). See page 11 for
more details.
Pad
KP65
DTX502
KP65
Using a KU100 Kick Unit as a Kick Pedal
KU100
OUTPUT
DTX502
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
77
Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums
The following describes a couple of examples of how you can integrate electronic and acoustic
drums.
By attaching a CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment and a drum
holder to the cymbal stand from an acoustic drum kit, you can
easily add an electronic drum pad such as the TP70, XP70, or
XP80 to that kit. The following diagram shows a typical example
of how the various components can be set up. When assembled,
remember to set the Pad Type parameter (page 68) to match the
drum pad being used.
You can attach a DT10 or DT20 Drum Trigger to the head or shell
of an acoustic drum to send a trigger signal to your drum module
whenever the drum is struck.
If connecting an acoustic drum via a DT10 or DT20 Drum Trig-
ger in this way, choose the appropriate DT10/DT20 setting for the
Pad Type parameter. See page 68 for more details.
Adding Drum Pads to an Acoustic Drum
Set
Typical setup
Holder
Cymbal stand
Electronic drum pad
(TP70, XP70, or XP80, etc.)
CSAT924A Cymbal Stand
Attachment
XP80
DTX502
KP65
Playing the DTX502 Using Acoustic
Drums
NOTE
•If you wish to play User Waves, refer to the Reference Manual
(page 79).
If the acoustic drum produces multiple sounds when hit, adjust the
settings of the Minimum Level parameter (page 68), the Reject
Time parameter (page 69 ), and the Noise Filter parameter (page
69).
If the sensitivity of the drum trigger seems to low, adjust the set-
tings of the Gain parameter (page 68) and the Wait Time parameter
(page 69).
Typical setup
DT10 or DT20
Drum Trigger
To DTX502
DT10/DT20
DT10/DT20
DTX502
Advanced Techniques
Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums
78
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
The drum module can be conveniently mounted on a hi-hat stand
using a CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment. The following
diagram shows a typical example of how the various components
can be set up.
Mounting the DTX502 on a Hi-Hat Stand
Typical setup
Hi-hat stand
DTX502
CSAT924A Cymbal Stand
Attachment
DTX502
Hi-hat stand
CSAT924A Cymbal
Stand Attachment
Advanced Techniques
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
79
Connecting to a Computer
While your DTX502 is highly powerful and versatile all by itself,
you can connect it to a computer via USB for even greater conve-
nience and flexibility. When connected in this way, MIDI and
audio-file data can be freely exchanged with the computer, allow-
ing the drum module to be used as an input device for music pro-
duction applications. In this section, you’ll learn how to make the
necessary connections.
1. Turn off the drum module.
2. Start up your computer.
Shut down all applications before proceeding to the next
step.
3. Connect a USB cable first to the drum module’s [USB TO
HOST] terminal and then to the computer.
4. Turn on the drum module.
You will now be able to exchange data between the drum
module and computer.
Yamaha USB-MIDI driver
In most situations, there is no need to install the Yamaha
USB-MIDI driver and the above setup procedure will suffice.
If, however, your computer is having difficulty communicat-
ing with the drum module, please download the standard
Yamaha USB-MIDI driver from the following web page and
install it on your computer.
http://download.yamaha.com/
Precautions when using the [USB TO
HOST] terminal
If proper care is not taken when connecting your drum mod-
ule to a computer via the [USB TO HOST] terminal, either or
both of the devices may freeze or data may become corrupted
or be permanently lost. Be sure, therefore, to observe the fol-
lowing precautions at this time. If the drum module or com-
puter should freeze, restart the application being used, reboot
the computer, or turn the drum module off once and then back
on.
The Reference Manual for the DTX502 is made available as a
PDF document and contains the following.
Instructions on how to transfer song and audio data from your
computer to the drum module.
Reference material that will prove useful when making music
using the drum module and a computer
• MIDI-related reference information
The Reference Manual is available for download as a PDF file
from the following web page.
http://download.yamaha.com/
*: Yamaha Corporation reserves the right to modify this URL at any
time without prior notice.
Making Connections
NOTE
As the drum module has no built-in speakers, you will need to con-
nect headphones or loudspeakers in order to hear it. For details, see
page 12.
NOTE
Information on system requirements is also provided on the
above web page.
The USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior
notice. Before installing, please visit the above web page to
confirm that you have the most up-to-date version.
[USB TO HOST] terminal
(DTX502 rear panel)
USB
terminal
Computer
Drum module
USB cable
Use a USB A-B cable of less than 3 meters in length.
Do not use a USB 3.0 cable.
Before connecting to a computer via the [USB TO
HOST] terminal, restore it from any power-saving mode
(such as Suspend, Sleep, or Standby).
Connect your computer via the [USB TO HOST] termi-
nal before turning on the drum module.
Be sure to always perform the following steps before
turning the drum module on or off and either plugging
in or unplugging a USB cable.
Shut down all applications.
Ensure that no data is being sent from the drum
module. (Data is transmitted by striking the pads
and by playing songs.)
Always wait for at least six seconds between turning
the drum module on and off and between plugging in
and unplugging a USB cable.
DTX502 Reference Manual
NOTICE
Reference
80
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Error Messages
No memory is available for User songs. Please delete unneeded User songs
before recording.
Recording was carried out with a Preset song selected, but no memory is avail-
able for User songs.
•User data could not be stored when the drum module was turned off.
• After displaying this error message, the Factory Set will be automatically
restored.
Reference
Reference
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
81
Troubleshooting
In addition to the following, you can also find troubleshooting tips in the Reference Manual
(PDF). See page 79 for details on downloading this manual.
No sound is produced when a pad is struck or the vol-
ume is lower than expected.
Check connections as follows.
•Ensure that the pads are properly connected to the drum
modules trigger input jacks.
•Ensure that the dru m module is properly connected to head-
phones or other audio equipment, such as an amplifier and/
or speakers.
•Ensure that the amplifier and/or speakers connected to the
drum module are turned on and are not set to the lowest pos-
sible volume.
If you are using a KP65 Kick Pad, try adjusting its Level dial.
•Ensure that the cables you are using are in good condition.
Check the drum module’s settings as follows.
•Ensure that volumes are set appropriately. (See pages 15,
19, 24, and 59.)
•Ensure that the voice for the pad you are striking is not set to
“No Assign. No sound is produced with this setting. (See
pages 21 and 59.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Decay page (KitV6) from
Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 59.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Cutoff Frequenc
y page
(KitV7) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 59.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Function page (Pad3)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Velocity Curve page
(TRG2) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 67.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from
Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page
(TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Local Control page
(System5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page
74.)
If you cannot play foot closed hi-hat sounds, try the fol-
lowing.
•Ensure that you are operating the hi-hat controller in a firm
and full manner.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Double Bass Switch page
(KitC1) from Menu Mode is set to “off. (See page 61.)
•Lower the setting of the parameter on the Foot Close Position
page (Pad2) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)
If edge and cup sounds cannot be played or the choking
technique does not work when using a cymbal pad, try the
following.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
If using a PCY100 Cymbal Pad as the hi-hat, ens
ur
e that the
cup switch (CUP SW) on the rear of the pad is set to the ON
position in order to play cup sounds. (See page 17.)
Sounds or volumes are not as expected.
If hi-hat splash sounds are not produced as expected, try
the following.
•Adjust the parameter setting on the Hi-hat Hi-hat Splash Sen-
sitivity page (Pad1) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)
If it is difficult to produce closed hi-hat sounds, try the fol-
lowing.
•Adjust the parameter setting on the Foot Close Position page
(Pad2) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)
If it is difficult to produce quieter hi-hat sounds, try the fol-
lowing.
•Check whether the parameter on the Double Bass Switch
page (KitC1) is set to “on”. In certain cases, this setting can
make it more difficult to produce quieter hi-hat sounds. (See
page 61.)
If sounds cannot be produced as expected when playing
the pads connected to the [wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1],
[rTOM3/!2], and/or [uKICK/i] trigger input jack, try the
following.
•Check whether you have connected a two- or three-zone pad
to the jack in question. In certain situations, this can result in
unexpected sounds being produced. If this is the case, set
the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3) from Menu
Mode to “off. (See page 68.)
If sounds are distorted, try the following.
•Lower the drum modules master volume. (See page 15.)
If v
oices play endlessly and do not stop, try the following.
Press the [KIT] button several times to silence all voices.
If pads are producing only sounds at very high volumes
(i.e., high velocities), try the following.
•Adjust the sensitivity of the drum module’s kits. (See page 19.)
•Adjust the parameter on the Velocity Curve page (TRG2)
from Menu Mode. (See page 67.)
•Adjust the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu
Mode. High settings will result in loud drum sounds. (See
page 68.)
•Ensure that you are using only the recommended Yamaha
pads. (Products from other manufacturers can output exces-
sively large signals.)
If the volumes of sounds produced by different pads are
poorly balanced, try the following.
•Adjust the volumes of the various input groups on the Mixer
page (MIXER) from Menu Mode. (See page 57.)
•Adjust the volumes of individual input sources on the Volume
page (KitV3) from Menu Mode. (See page 59.)
If reverb cannot be applied, try the following.
•Ensure that the reverb level on the Mixer page (MIXER) from
Menu Mode
is not set too low. (See page 57.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Send (Source) page
(
KitV11
) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 60.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Send (Voices) page
(KitC2) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 61.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Type page (KitC3)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Return page
(KitC4) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.)
If the drum module’s volume is not well balanced with that
of the device connected to the [AUX IN] jack (such as a
portable music player), try the following.
•Ensure that the volume of the connected device is set to a
suitable level. (See page 12.)
If the volume of your drumming is not well balanced with
that of a drum-module song, try the following.
•Adjust the song volume. (See page 26.)
Reference
Troubleshooting
82
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
If you notice double triggering, crosstalk, or skipped
sounds (as described below), try the following.
Double triggering—i.e., multiple sounds are produced in
response to a single strike:
If the pad or drum trigger in question features a controller for
adjusting output or sensitivity, turn it down.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from
Menu Mode is not set too high. (See page 68.)
Crosstalk is occurring—i.e., a sound is produced by a pad
other than the one that was struck.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Trigger Setup page (TRG1)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from
Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page
(TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reject Time page (TRG7)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 69.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.)
•Ensure that the parameters on the Crosstalk Pads page
(TRG11) from Menu Mode are set appropriately. (See page
70.)
If using a pad featuring a level adjuster, ensure that it is set
appropriately.
Skipped sounds—i.e., a pad does not produce a sound
(usually during rolls or fills):
•Ensure that the parameter on the Reject Time page (TRG7)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 69.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.)
If hi-hat
sounds are occasionally produced even though
the hi-hat controller is configured to produce a kick drum
sound (i.e., DblBass is set to “on”), try the following.
Increase the setting of the parameter on the Minimum Level
page (TRG5) from Menu Mode. Note that if this setting is too
high, it may become difficult to play the hi-hat. (See page 68.)
If only one voice is triggered when two pads are played
simultaneously, try the following.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Trigger Setup page (TRG1)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from
Menu Mode is set appropriately for the pad that does not trig-
ger a voice. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page
(TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately for the pad that
does not trigger a voice. (See page 68.)
•Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.)
•Ensure that the parameters on the Crosstalk Pads page
(TRG11) from Menu Mode are set appropriately. (See page
70.)
•Ensure that both pads are not assigned to the same group on
the Alternate Group page (KitV13) from Menu Mode. (See
page 61.)
Optional add-on products do not operate as expected.
If consistent, reliable trigger signals cannot be produced
using a drum trigger attached to an acoustic drum, try the
following.
Read the section Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums.
(See page 77.)
•Mute the head if it is vibrating in an irregular fashion.
•Ensure that the drum trigger is attached in the vicinity of the
rim and not near the center of the head.
•Ensure that the drum trigger makes contact only with the
drum.
If a pad controller does not work as expected, try the fol-
lowing.
•Ensure that you are using a pad featuring a pad controller.
•Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Control page (KitC5)
from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.)
•Avoid holding the rim while operating the pad controller as
this can prevent it from working properly.
Other common questions
How do I make the drum module store its settings?
The drum module automatically stores its system settings
whenever you turn it off using the [ ] (Standby/On) button.
Do not turn off the drum module by unplugging the power
adaptor: It will not be able to store its system settings in such
a case.
User settings for kits, click sets, and triggers must be stored
manually. (See pages 25, 37, and 56.)
How do I reset all of the drum module’s parameters to their
default settings?
Use the function on the Factory Set page (System10) from
Menu Mode to restore the default settings. (See page 75.)
How do I reset all of the drum module’s parameters to the
settings they had when I last turned it on?
Use the function on the Restore page (System9) from Menu
Mode. (See page 75.)
How do I stop the drum module turning off before I’m fin-
ished using it?
Set the parameter on the Auto Power-Off page (System8)
from Menu Mode to “off. (See page 75.)
Why won’t a selected song play?
If the song you selected contains no data, the drum module
will not be able to play it.
Ho
w do I stop the drum module changing the current drum
kit when I select a different song?
By default, your drum module always chooses the best kit for
each song. To prevent it from doing so, set the parameter on
the Kit Lock page (System1) from Menu Mode to “on. (See
page 73.)
How do I have my drum module choose the best drum kit
for each song?
Set the parameter on the Kit Lock page (System1) from Menu
Mode to “off. (See page 73.)
What should I do if I can’t hear a song’s drum parts?
•Ensure that the drum parts have not been muted. (See page
27.)
My training scores are strange. Why is this?
Crosstalk could be triggering sounds unintentionally as you
drum. See the above section Crosstalk is occurring.
Reference
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
83
Instrument Name List
Data List
Preset Kit List
No. Name
1 Maple Custom
2 Modern Rock
3 Elect Dub1
4 Bop Kit
5 Vintage 50s
6Funk Kit
7 Trance PWR
8Big Kit
9 Metal Kit
10 Percs Master
11 Oak Custom
12 Birch Custom
13 Beech Custom
14 Vintage 70s
15 Garage Punk
16 Hard Rock
17 Legend RX
18 Funk Master
19 70s NY
20 Jazz Kit
21 Acid Jazz
22 Deep Brush
23 Reggae Kit
24 Elect Dub2
25 Weapon X Dub
26 Electro Pop
27 Gate Kit
28 Digi Rock
29 DNB
30 Chill Out
31 Izzle’s R&B1
32 Izzle’s R&B2
33 ButiqHipHop1
34 ButiqHipHop2
35 Hexagon
36 Beat Box8
37 Beat Box9
38 MG Kit
39 Deep Kit
40 Vocal Drums
41 Drum Corps
42 Orchestra
43 Cuban
44 Brazil
45 Africa
46 Arabic
47 Indian Pop
48 China
49 Japan
50 GM Kit
Song List
No. Type Name
1 Demo Demo
2
Practice
Rock Mix
3FunkRock
4SkatePnk
5 HardRock
6HvyMetal
75/4PrgRk
8RckShfle
9 ClsShfle
10 80sShfle
11 8beatFnk
12 R&B Funk
13 CoolFunk
14 MedBlues
15 SlwBlues
16 HipHop 1
17 HipHop 2
18 R&B 1
19 R&B 2
20 ModnSoul
21 ElecDub1
22 ElecDub2
23 ElecDub3
24 ElectPop
25 Dance
26 TrncePWR
27 Soul Pop
28 6/8 Pop
29 8beatPop
30 16beatRk
31 ModnBald
32 PowerBld
33 MedSwing
34 FstSwing
35 Bossa
36 LatinSmb
37 Songo
38 Reggae
39
Pad Song
Funk C
40 Funk F
41 FunkOrgn
42 Dance 1
43 Dance 2
44 Dance 3
45 DanceSeq
46 ChilOut1
47 ChilOut2
48 ChilOut3
49 DigiRck1
50 DigiRck2
51 DigiRck3
52 RollFill
53 TrancSeq
54 Bongo
55 Conga 1
56 Conga 2
57
Shaker
58 Tambrin
59 Triangle
60 Samba
Kick
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 MapleC 22
2 OakC 22-1
3 OakC 22-2
4 BirchC 22
5 BeechC 22
6Rock
7 Metal
8 HardRock
9 Vtg70s 24
10 Vtg70s24Mt
11 Vtg50s 22
12 Vtg50s22Mt
13 Jazz
14 RX5
15 T8-1
16 T8-2
17 T8 Down
18 T9-1
19 T9-2
20 T9 Hard
21 Sm
22 ElecComp
23 Trance PWR
24 Gate 1
25 Gate 2
26 Electric 1
27 Electric 2
28 Electric 3
29 Electric 4
30 Electric 5
31 Electric 6
32 Electric 7
33 Electric 8
34 R&B 1
35 R&B 2
36 R&B 3
37 HipHop 1
38 HipHop 2
39 HipHop 3
40 HipHop 4
41 HipHop 5
42 HipHop 6
43 HipHop 7
44 HipHop 8
45 Break 1
46 Break 2
47 DNB 1
48 DNB 2
Snare
No. Name
0 No Assign
1MapleCustm
2OakCustom
3 BirchCustm
4 BeechCustm
5Rock
6Metal
7 HardRock
8 Vintage70s
9 Vintage50s
10 Funk
11 DeepOak
12 Jazz
13 Deep Brush
14 RX
15 T8
16 T9
17 Sm
18 Synth
19 Analog
20 MG Snare
21 TrancePWR1
22 TrancePWR2
23 Gate 1
24 Gate 2
25 Gate 3
26 Gate 4
27 Gate 5
28 Gate 6
29 Gate 7
30 Gate 8
31 Electro 1
32 Electro 2
33 Electro 3
34 Electro 4
35 Electro 5
36 Electro 6
37 Electro 7
38 Electro 8
39 Electro 9
40 Electro 10
41 R&B 1
42 R&B 2
43 R&B 3
44 HipHop
45 Break 1
46 Break 2
47 DNB
Reference
Data List
84
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Cymbal
No. Name
0 No Assign
1Bright 18
2Warm 16
3Dark 18-1
4Dark 18-2
5Vivid 17
6 Thin 16
7 Vintage 18
8 Vintage 16
9 Jazz 18
10 Bright 20
11 War m R d 2 0
12 Dark 20-1
13 Dark 20-2
14 VtgRd 22
15 JazzRd 22
16 SzRide 20
17 Bright 18R
18 China 19
19 China 17
20 Splash 1
21 Splash 2
22 Trash
23 RX Cymbal
24 RX Ride
25 T8 Crash
26 T9 Crash
27 T8 Ride
28 T9 Ride
29 MG Ride
30 SynCrash 1
31 SynCrash 2
32 ElecCym 1
33 ElecCym 2
34 ElecCym 3
35 ElecCym 4
36 ElecCym 5
37 ElecCym 6
38 ElecCym 7
39 ElecCym 8
40 ElecRide 1
41 ElecRide 2
42 ElecRide 3
43 ElecRide 4
44 HipHopCr 1
45 HipHopCr 2
46 HipHopCr 3
47 HipHopCr 4
48 HipHopCr 5
49 HipHopRd
50 Lo-Fi Cym
51 NoiseCym 1
52 NoiseCym 2
53 NoiseCym 3
54 RevCym 1
55 RevCym 2
56 Vo China
57 Vo Ride
Hi-Hat
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 Bright 14
2Dark 14-1
3Dark 14-2
4Cool 14
5 Vintage 14
6 Jazz 14
7Brush
8RX
9T8
10 T9
11 Electro 1
12 Electro 2
13 Electro 3
14 Dubstep
15 R&B 1
16 R&B 2
17 R&B 3
18 HipHop 1
19 HipHop 2
20 ChillOut
21 DNB
22 Vo HH
Percussion
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 Conga H SW
2 Conga L SW
3 Bongo H SW
4 Bongo L SW
5Timbales H
6Timbales L
7Surdo SW
8 PndeiroOp
9 PndeiroTap
10 PndeiroShk
11 PndeiroSld
12 Tambarin 1
13 Tambarin 2
14 Cowbell1SW
15 Cowbell 2
16 Cowbell 3
17 Claves
18 Maracas
19 TriangleOp
20 TriangleMt
21 GuiroShort
22 GuiroLong
23 Agogo H
24 Agogo L
25 WoodBlockH
26 WoodBlockL
27 Shaker 1
28 Shaker 2
29 Caxixi Hit
30 Whistle S
31 Whistle L
32 Djambe Lo
33 Djambe Op
34 Djambe Slp
35 Djambe Mt
36 Cajion Lo
37 Cajion Ft
38 Cajion Slp
39 Cajion Mt
40 TalkDr Op
41 PotDrum Op
42 Dundun Op
43 Dundun Cl
44 Darbuka Op
45 Darbuka Sl
46 Darbuka Mt
47 Sangban Op
48 Kenkeni Op
49 AfricanBlH
50 AfricanBlL
51 Tombak Op
52 Daf Open
53 Daf Slap
54 Daf Mute
55 Riq Open
56 Riq Slap
57 Riq Shake
58
Riq Hit
59 Sagat Op
60 Sagat Cl
61 Sagat SW
62 Tabla Na
63 Bayan Ge
64 Dhol RH Op
65 Dhol RH Cl
66 Dhol LH Op
67 Dhol LH Cl
68 KanjiraHit
69 KanjiraSlp
70 KanjiraShk
71 ZangGu
72 ZangGu Rim
73 BianGu
74 BianGu Rim
75 BianGuHand
76 TangGu
77 TangGu Rim
78 PaiGu 1
79 PaiGu 2
80 PaiGu 3
81 XiaoBo Opn
82 XiaoBo Cls
83 DaBo Opn
84 DaBo Cls
85 XiaoLuo
86 ZhongLuo
87 FengLuo
88 ShangNao 1
89 ShangNao 2
90 Qing H
91 Qing L
92 Taiko Don
93 Taiko Ka
94 KoTaik1Ten
95 KoTaik1Tsu
96 KoTaik2Ten
97 KoTaik2Tsu
98 TsuzumiPon
99 TsuzumiBnd
100 OokawaChon
101 Temple Blk
102 KontikiKon
103 Kontiki Ki
104 Atari Kon
105 Atari Chi
106 Ainote 1
107 Ainote 2
108 GranCasaOp
109 Field Sn
110 FldSn OpRm
111 FldSn ClRm
112 O rchSn
113 OrchSnOpRm
114 OrchSnClRm
115 O r TambHtOp
116 O r TambHtCl
117 O r TambHtSk
118 Castanet
119 V i braslap
120 SleighBel
121 WindChime
122 HandCym Op
123 HandCym Mt
124 FingrCymOp
125 RibonCrash
126 Timpani
127 Tamtam
No. Name
Tom
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 MapleC H
2 MapleC M
3 MapleC L
4OakC H
5OakC M
6OakC L
7 BirchC H
8 BirchC M
9 BirchC L
10 BeechC H
11 BeechC M
12 BeechC L
13 Rock H
14 Rock M
15 Rock L
16 Metal H
17 Metal M
18 Metal L
19 HardRock H
20 HardRock M
21 HardRock L
22 Vintg70s H
23 Vintg70s M
24 Vintg70s L
25 Vintg50s H
26 Vintg50s M
27 Vintg50s L
28 Jazz H
29 Jazz M
30 Jazz L
31 Brush H
32 Brush M
33 Brush L
34 Marching H
35 Marching M
36 Marching L
37 RX5 H
38 RX5 M
39 RX5 L
40 T8-1 H
41 T8-1 M
42 T8-1 L
43 T8-2 H
44 T8-2 M
45 T8-2 L
46 T9 H
47 T9 M
48 T9 L
49 Sm H
50 Sm M
51 Sm L
52 Synth H
53 Synth M
54 Synth L
55 Big H
56 Big M
57 Big L
58 Gate 1 H
59 Gate 1 M
60 Gate 1 L
61 Gate 2 H
62 Gate 2 M
63 Gate 2 L
64 Gate 3 H
65 Gate 3 M
66 Gate 3 L
67 Noise H
68 Noise M
69 Noise L
70 Electric 1
71 Electric 2
72 Electric 3
73 Amb To m
74 DNB H
75 DNB M
76 DNB L
Reference
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Data List
85
Voice List
Effect
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 ElecPerc 1
2 ElecPerc 2
3 ElecPerc 3
4 ElecPerc 4
5 ElecPerc 5
6 ElecPerc 6
7 ElecPerc 7
8 ElecPerc 8
9 ElecPerc 9
10 ElecPerc10
11 E lecPe rc11
12 ElecPerc12
13 ElecPerc13
14 ElecPerc14
15 ElecPerc15
16 ElecPerc16
17 ElecPerc17
18 ElecPerc18
19 ElecPerc19
20 ElecPerc20
21 ElecPerc21
22 ElecPerc22
23 ElecPerc23
24 ElecPerc24
25 An Cowbell
26 An Claves
27 An Shaker
28 ElcClaves1
29 ElcClaves2
30 ElecShaker
31 HiQ
32 Zap
33 NLZap
34 SynPerc
35 ClickDelay
36 An Clap
37 T9 Clap
38 HandClap
39 HHopClap 1
40 HHopClap 2
41 HHopClap 3
42 HHopClap 4
43 HHopClap 5
44 HHopClap 6
45 HHopClap 7
46 HHopClap 8
47 HHopClap 9
48 HHopClap10
49 HHopClap11
50 HHopClap12
51 HHopSnap 1
52 HHopSnap 2
53 HHopSnap 3
54 HipHop FX
55 XfdSnare 1
56 XfdSnare 2
57 XfdSnare 3
58 MG Kick 1
59 MG Kick 2
60 MG Kick 3
61 MG Kick 4
62 MG Kick 5
63 MG Kick 6
64 MG Snare 1
65 MG Snare 2
66 MG FX 1
67 MG FX 2
68 Synth 1
69 Synth 2
70 Synth 3
71 Vo Kick
72 Vo Snare
73 Vo SnOp
74 Vo SnClR
75 Vo Tom H
76 Vo Tom M
77 Vo Tom L
78 Vo HH Op
79 Vo HH OpE
80 Vo HH Cl
81 Vo HH ClE
82 Vo HH Ft
83 Vo HH Sp
84 Vo Ride
85 Vo China
86 Vo Cowbell
87 Vo Clap
88 Lazer 1
89 Lazer 2
90 Noise 1
91 Noise 2
92 WhiteNoise
93 Raspberry
94 SE 1
95 SE 2
96 SE 3
97 SE 4
98 SE 5
99 SE 6
100 SE 7
101 SE 8
102 Uh
103 Hey
104 One
105 Two
106 Three
107 Four
108 Clk 1 Acc
109 Clk 1 4th
110 Clk 1 8th
111 Clk 1 16th
112 Clk 1 Trp
113 Clk 2 Acc
114 Clk 2 Beat
115 Clk 3 Acc
116 Clk 3 Beat
117 Clk 4 Acc
118 Clk 4 Beat
No. Name
Kick
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 MapleC 22
2OakC 22-1
3OakC 22-2
4 BirchC 22
5 BeechC 22
6Rock
7 Metal
8 HardRock
9 Vtg70s 24
10 Vtg70s24Mt
11 Vtg50s 22
12 Vtg50s22Mt
13 Jazz
14 RX5
15 T8-1
16 T8-2
17 T8 Down
18 T9-1
19 T9-2
20 T9 Hard
21 Sm
22 ElecComp
23 Trance PWR
24 Gate 1
25 Gate 2
26 Electric 1
27 Electric 2
28 Electric 3
29 Electric 4
30 Electric 5
31 Electric 6
32 Electric 7
33 Electric 8
34 R&B 1
35 R&B 2
36 R&B 3
37 HipHop 1
38 HipHop 2
39 HipHop 3
40 HipHop 4
41 HipHop 5
42 HipHop 6
43 HipHop 7
44 HipHop 8
45 Break 1
46 Break 2
47 DNB 1
48 DNB 2
Snare
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 MapleCustm
2 MapleCOpRm
3 MapleCClRm
4 MapleCOff
5 MapleCOpOf
6 MapleCClOf
7OakCustom
8 OakC OpRm
9 OakC ClRm
10 OakC Off
11 OakC OpOf
12 OakC ClOf
13 BirchCustm
14 BirchCOpRm
15 BirchCClRm
16 BirchC Off
17 BirchCOpOf
18 BirchCClOf
19 BeechCustm
20 BeechCOpRm
21 BeechCClRm
22 BeechC Off
23 BeechCOpOf
24 BeechCClOf
25 Rock
26 Rock OpRm
27 Rock ClRm
28 Rock Off
29 Rock OpOf
30 Rock ClOf
31 Metal
32 Metal OpRm
33 Metal ClRm
34 Metal Off
35 Metal OpOf
36 Metal ClOf
37 HardRock
38 HRock OpRm
39 HRock ClRm
40 HRock Off
41 HRock OpOf
42 HRock ClOf
43 Vintage70s
44 Vtg70sOpRm
45 Vtg70sClRm
46 Vtg70s Off
47 Vtg70sOpOf
48 Vtg70sClOf
49 Vintage50s
50 Vtg50sOpRm
51 Vtg50sClRm
52 Vtg50s Off
53 Vtg50sOpOf
54 Vtg50sClOf
55 Funk
56 Funk OpRim
57 Funk ClRim
58 Funk Off
59 Funk OpOf
60 Funk ClOf
61 DeepOak
62 DpOak OpRm
63 DpOak ClRm
64 DpOak Off
65 DpOak OpOf
66 DpOak ClOf
67 Jazz
68 Jazz OpRim
69 Jazz ClRim
70 Jazz Off
71 Jazz OpOf
72 Jazz ClOf
73 Brush
74 B rush OpRm
75 Amb Rim
76 RX11-1
77 RX11-2
78 RX5-1
79 RX5-2
80 RX11 Rim
81 RX5 Rim
82 T8-1
83 T8-2
84 T9-1
85 T9-2
86 T8 Rim
87 T9 Rim
88 Sm
89 Synth
90 Analog
91 Analog Rim
92 TrancePWR1
93 TrancePWR2
94 Gate 1
95 Gate 2
96 Gate 3
97 Gate 4
98 Gate 5
99 Gate 6
100 Gate 7
101 Gate 8
102 Gate Rim
103 Electro 1
104 Electro 2
105 Electro 3
106 Electro 4
107 Electro 5
108 Electro 6
109 Electro 7
110 Electro 8
111 Electro 9
112 E l e c t ro 10
113 ElectroRim
114 R & B 1
115 R & B 2
116 R & B 3
117 R&B 1 Rim
118 R&B 2 Rim
119 R&B 3 Rim
120 HipHop
121 Break 1
122 Break 2
123 Break Rim
124 DNB 1
125 DNB 2
126 DNB 3
No. Name
Reference
Data List
86
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Tom
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 MapleC H
2 MapleC M
3 MapleC L
4OakC H
5OakC M
6OakC L
7 BirchC H
8 BirchC M
9 BirchC L
10 BeechC H
11 BeechC M
12 BeechC L
13 Rock H
14 Rock M
15 Rock L
16 Metal H
17 Metal M
18 Metal L
19 HardRock H
20 HardRock M
21 HardRock L
22 Vintg70s H
23 Vintg70s M
24 Vintg70s L
25 Vintg50s H
26 Vintg50s M
27 Vintg50s L
28 Jazz H
29 Jazz M
30 Jazz L
31 Brush H
32 Brush M
33 Brush L
34 Marching H
35 Marching M
36 Marching L
37 RX5 H
38 RX5 M
39 RX5 L
40 T8-1 H
41 T8-1 M
42 T8-1 L
43 T8-2 H
44 T8-2 M
45 T8-2 L
46 T9 H
47 T9 M
48 T9 L
49 Sm H
50 Sm M
51 Sm L
52 Synth H
53 Synth M
54 Synth L
55 Big H
56 Big M
57 Big L
58 Gate 1 H
59 Gate 1 M
60 Gate 1 L
61 Gate 2 H
62 Gate 2 M
63 Gate 2 L
64 Gate 3 H
65 Gate 3 M
66 Gate 3 L
67 Noise H
68 Noise M
69 Noise L
70 Electric 1
71 Electric 2
72 Electric 3
73 Amb To m
74 DNB H
75 DNB M
76 DNB L
Cymbal
No. Name
0 No Assign
1Bright18
2 Bright18Eg
3 Bright18Cp
4Warm 16
5Warm 16Eg
6Warm 16Cp
7 Dark18-1
8 Dark18-1Eg
9 Dark18-1Cp
10 Dark18-2
11 Da rk18 - 2 E g
12 Dark18-2Cp
13 Vivid 17
14 Vivid 17Eg
15 Vivid 17Cp
16 Thin 16
17 Thin 16Eg
18 Thin 16Cp
19 Vintage 18
20 Vintg 18Eg
21 Vintg 18Cp
22 Vintage 16
23 Vintg 16Eg
24 Vintg 16Cp
25 Jazz 18
26 Jazz 18Eg
27 Jazz 18Cp
28 Bright20
29 Bright20Eg
30 Bright20Cp
31 WarmRd20
32 WarmRd20Eg
33 WarmRd20Cp
34 Dark20-1
35 Dark20-1Eg
36 Dark20-1Cp
37 Dark20-2
38 Dark20-2Eg
39 Dark20-2Cp
40 VtgRd 22
41 VtgRd 22Eg
42 VtgRd 22Cp
43 JazzRd22
44 JazzRd22Eg
45 JazzRd22Cp
46 SzRide 20
47 SzRd 20Eg
48 SzRd 20Cp
49 Bright18R
50 China 19
51 China 17
52 Splash 1
53 Splash 2
54 Trash
55 RX11 Crash
56 RX5 Crash
57 RX11 Ride
58 RX5 RdEg
59 RX5 RdCp
60 T8 Crash
61 T9 Crash
62 T8 Ride
63 T9 Ride
64 SynCrash 1
65 SynCrash 2
66 ElecCym 1
67 ElecCym 2
68 ElecCym 3
69 ElecCym 4
70 ElecCym 5
71 ElecCym 6
72 ElecCym 7
73 ElecCym 8
74 ElecRide 1
75 ElecRd 1Eg
76 ElecRd 1Cp
77 ElecRd 2Cp
78 ElecRide 3
79 ElecRide 4
80 HipHopCr 1
81 HipHopCr 2
82 HipHopCr 3
83 HipHopCr 4
84 HipHopCr 5
85 HipHopRd
86 HipHopRdCp
87 Lo-Fi Cym
88 NoiseCym 1
89 NoiseCym 2
90 NoiseCym 3
91 RevCym 1
92 RevCym 2
No. Name
Hi-Hat
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 Bright14Op
2Brt14OpEg
3Brt14OpCp
4 Bright14Cl
5 Brt14ClEg
6 Brt14ClCp
7 Bright14Ft
8 Bright14Sp
9 Dark14-1Op
10 Dk14-1OpEg
11 Dk14-1OpCp
12 Dark14-1Cl
13 Dk14-1ClEg
14 Dk14-1ClCp
15 Dark14-1Ft
16 Dark14-1Sp
17 Dark14-2Op
18 Dk14-2OpEg
19 Dk14-2OpCp
20 Dark14-2Cl
21 Dk14-2ClEg
22 Dk14-2ClCp
23 Dark14-2Ft
24 Dark14-2Sp
25 Cool14 Op
26 Cool14OpEg
27 Cool14OpCp
28 Cool14 Cl
29 Cool14ClEg
30 Cool14ClCp
31 Cool14 Ft
32 Cool14 Sp
33 Vintg14 Op
34 Vtg14 OpEg
35 Vtg14 OpCp
36 Vintg14 Cl
37 Vtg14 ClEg
38 Vtg14 ClCp
39 Vintg14 Ft
40 Vintg14 Sp
41 Jazz14 Op
42 Jazz14OpEg
43 Jazz14OpCp
44 Jazz14 Cl
45 Jazz14ClEg
46 Jazz14ClCp
47 Jazz14 Ft
48 Jazz14 Sp
49 RX11 Op
50 RX5 Op
51 RX11 Cl
52 RX5 Cl
53 T8 Op
54 T8 Cl
55 T9 Op
56 T9 Cl
57 Elec1 Op
58 Elec1 OpEg
59 Elec1 Cl
60 Elec1 ClEg
61 Elec1 Ft
62 Elec1 Sp
63 Elec2 Op
64 Elec2 OpEg
65 Elec2 Cl
66 Elec2 ClEg
67 Elec2 Ft
68 Elec2 Sp
69 Elec3 Op
70 Elec3 OpEg
71 Elec3 Cl
72 Elec3 ClEg
73 Elec4 Cl
74 R&B1 Op
75 R&B1 Cl
76 R&B1 Ft
77 R&B1 Sp
78 R&B2 Op
79 R&B2 Ft
80 R&B3 Op
81 R&B3 Cl
82 R&B3 Ft
83 HipHop1 Op
84 HHop1 OpEg
85 HipHop1 Cl
86 HHop1 ClEg
87 HipHop1 Ft
88 HipHop2 Op
89 HipHop2 Cl
90 HHop2 ClEg
91 HipHop2 Ft
92 DNB Op
93 DNB Cl
94 DNB Ft
95 Machine 1
96 Machine 2
97 Machine 3
98 Machine 4
99 Analog 1
100 Analog 2
101 Analog 3
102 Analog 4
103 Analog 5
104 FX HiHat
No. Name
Reference
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Data List
87
Percussion
No. Name
0 No Assign
1Conga H SW
2Conga L SW
3 Bongo H SW
4 Bongo L SW
5Timbales H
6Timbales L
7Surdo SW
8 PndeiroOp
9 PndeiroTap
10 PndeiroShk
11 PndeiroSld
12 Tambarin 1
13 Tambarin 2
14 Cowbell1SW
15 Cowbell 2
16 Cowbell 3
17 Claves
18 Maracas
19 TriangleOp
20 TriangleMt
21 GuiroShort
22 GuiroLong
23 Agogo H
24 Agogo L
25 WoodBlockH
26 WoodBlockL
27 Shaker 1
28 Shaker 2
29 Caxixi Hit
30 Whistle S
31 Whistle L
32 Djambe Lo
33 Djambe Op
34 Djambe Slp
35 Djambe Mt
36 Cajion Lo
37 Cajion Ft
38 Cajion Slp
39 Cajion Mt
40 TalkDr Op
41 PotDrum Op
42 Dundun Op
43 Dundun Cl
44 Darbuka Op
45 Darbuka Sl
46 Darbuka Mt
47 Sangban Op
48 Kenkeni Op
49 AfricanBlH
50 AfricanBlL
51 Tombak Op
52 Daf Open
53 Daf Slap
54 Daf Mute
55 Riq Open
56 Riq Slap
57 Riq Shake
58
Riq Hit
59 Sagat Op
60 Sagat Cl
61 Sagat SW
62 Tabla Na
63 Bayan Ge
64 Dhol RH Op
65 Dhol RH Cl
66 Dhol LH Op
67 Dhol LH Cl
68 KanjiraHit
69 KanjiraSlp
70 KanjiraShk
71 ZangGu
72 ZangGu Rim
73 BianGu
74 BianGu Rim
75 BianGuHand
76 TangGu
77 TangGu Rim
78 PaiGu 1
79 PaiGu 2
80 PaiGu 3
81 XiaoBo Opn
82 XiaoBo Cls
83 DaBo Opn
84 DaBo Cls
85 XiaoLuo
86 ZhongLuo
87 FengLuo
88 ShangNao 1
89 ShangNao 2
90 Qing H
91 Qing L
92 Taiko Don
93 Taiko Ka
94 KoTaik1Ten
95 KoTaik1Tsu
96 KoTaik2Ten
97 KoTaik2Tsu
98 TsuzumiPon
99 TsuzumiBnd
100 OokawaChon
101 Temple Blk
102 KontikiKon
103 Kontiki Ki
104 Atari Kon
105 Atari Chi
106 Ainote 1
107 Ainote 2
108 GranCasaOp
109 Field Sn
110 FldSn OpRm
111 FldSn ClRm
112 O rchSn
113 OrchSnOpRm
114 OrchSnClRm
115 O r TambHtOp
116 O r TambHtCl
117 O r TambHtSk
118 Castanet
119 V i braslap
120 SleighBel
121 WindChime
122 HandCym Op
123 HandCym Mt
124 FingrCymOp
125 RibonCrash
126 Timpani
127 Tamtam
No. Name
Effect
No. Name
0 No Assign
1 ElecPerc 1
2 ElecPerc 2
3 ElecPerc 3
4 ElecPerc 4
5 ElecPerc 5
6 ElecPerc 6
7 ElecPerc 7
8 ElecPerc 8
9 ElecPerc 9
10 ElecPerc10
11 E lecPe rc11
12 ElecPerc12
13 ElecPerc13
14 ElecPerc14
15 ElecPerc15
16 ElecPerc16
17 ElecPerc17
18 ElecPerc18
19 ElecPerc19
20 ElecPerc20
21 ElecPerc21
22 ElecPerc22
23 ElecPerc23
24 ElecPerc24
25 An Cowbell
26 An Claves
27 An Shaker
28 ElcClaves1
29 ElcClaves2
30 ElecShaker
31 HiQ
32 Zap
33 NLZap
34 SynPerc
35 ClickDelay
36 An Clap
37 T9 Clap
38 HandClap
39 HHopClap 1
40 HHopClap 2
41 HHopClap 3
42 HHopClap 4
43 HHopClap 5
44 HHopClap 6
45 HHopClap 7
46 HHopClap 8
47 HHopClap 9
48 HHopClap10
49 HHopClap11
50 HHopClap12
51 HHopSnap 1
52 HHopSnap 2
53 HHopSnap 3
54 HipHop FX
55 XfdSnare 1
56 XfdSnare 2
57 XfdSnare 3
58 MG Kick 1
59 MG Kick 2
60 MG Kick 3
61 MG Kick 4
62 MG Kick 5
63 MG Kick 6
64 MG Snare 1
65 MG Snare 2
66 MG FX 1
67 MG FX 2
68 Synth 1
69 Synth 2
70 Synth 3
71 Vo Kick
72 Vo Snare
73 Vo SnOp
74 Vo SnClR
75 Vo Tom H
76 Vo Tom M
77 Vo Tom L
78 Vo HH Op
79 Vo HH OpE
80 Vo HH Cl
81 Vo HH ClE
82 Vo HH Ft
83 Vo HH Sp
84 Vo Ride
85 Vo China
86 Vo Cowbell
87 Vo Clap
88 Lazer 1
89 Lazer 2
90 Noise 1
91 Noise 2
92 WhiteNoise
93 Raspberry
94 SE 1
95 SE 2
96 SE 3
97 SE 4
98 SE 5
99 SE 6
100 SE 7
101 SE 8
102 Uh
103 Hey
104 One
105 Two
106 Three
107 Four
108 Clk 1 Acc
109 Clk 1 4th
110 Clk 1 8th
111 C l k 1 16th
112 Clk 1 Trp
113 Clk 2 Acc
114 Clk 2 Beat
115 Clk 3 Acc
116 Clk 3 Beat
117 Clk 4 Acc
118 Clk 4 Beat
No. Name
Reference
88
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
*: Total memory capacity of 1 MB.
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corporation reserves the right to modify
products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment, and options may not be the same in every locale,
please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Tone generator
Ty pe AWM 2
Maximum polyphony 32 notes
Effect units
Reverb: 9 types
Master equalizer
Kits
Quantity
Preset: 50
User: 50*
Number of voices
Drums and percussion: 691
Keyboard: 128
Songs
Quantity
Demo songs: 1
Practice songs: 37
Pad songs: 22
User songs: 40
Sequencer capacity Approximately 104,000 notes*
Note resolution 96 subdivisions per quarter note
Recording method Real-time recording
Song format SMF
Metronome
User click sets 30
Tempo 30 to 300 BPM; tap tempo supported
Time signatures 1/4 to 16/4, 1/8 to 16/8, and 1/16 to 16/16
Subdivisions Accents, quarter notes, eighth notes, sixteenth notes, and eight-note triplets
Training Options 8
Triggers Trigger setups
Preset: 14
User: 16
Audio files
Import limit 20 files*
Bit depth 16 bits
Sampling format WAV or AIFF
Other items
Display elements
Backlit LCD with 2 rows of 16 characters; 3-digit, 7-segment LED; 2 LEDs for
tempo display
Connectors
Trigger inputs 1, 5, 6, and 9: Standard stereo-phone jacks (L: Trigger, R: Rim
switch)
Trigger inputs 2, 3, 4, and 7: Standard stereo-phone jacks (L: Trigger, R: Trigger)
[HI-HAT CONTROL]: Standard stereo-phone jack
OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R]: Standard phone jacks
[PHONES]: Standard stereo-phone jack
[AUX IN]: Mini stereo-phone jack
[USB TO HOST]
DC IN
Power consumption 4 W
Dimensions 251 (w) × 130 (d) × 48 (h) mm
Weight 610 g
Package contents
Power adaptor (PA-130 or equivalent Yamaha-approved product),
Owner’s Manual (this document), module holder, and module holder screws (x2)
DTX502 Owner’s Manual
89
Index
Symbols
[] connector ....................... 11
[] button .............................................. 11
   buttons ...................................... 10
[] button ......................................... 10
[] (Standby/On) button ....................... 10
[AUX IN] jack ......................................... 11
[HI-HAT CONTROL] jack ....................... 11
[KIT] button ............................................ 10
OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks ......... 11
[PHONES] jack ...................................... 11
[SAVE/ENTER] button ........................... 11
[SHIFT] button ....................................... 10
[SONG] button ....................................... 10
[USB TO HOST] terminal ................ 11, 79
VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons ................. 10
A
Acoustic Drums ..................................... 77
Alternate Group ..................................... 61
Auto Power-Off ...................................... 75
Auto Power-Off time .............................. 13
B
Bell shots ............................................... 18
Bow shots ........................................ 17, 18
C
Change Up ............................................ 44
Choking ................................................. 18
Clear User Kit ........................................ 65
Click Set .......................................... 32, 37
Closed sounds ....................................... 17
Computer ............................................... 79
Control Panel ......................................... 10
Copy Pad ............................................... 64
Copy Trigger .......................................... 71
Cord clip ................................................ 11
Count-In ................................................. 28
Crosstalk ................................................ 70
Crosstalk Pads ...................................... 70
CSAT924A ....................................... 77, 78
Cup shots .............................................. 17
Cutoff Frequency ................................... 59
Cymbal Sizes ......................................... 22
Cymbals ................................................. 18
D
Data Dial ................................................ 10
Decay .................................................... 59
Default Settings ..................................... 14
Deleting ................................................. 54
Difficulty Level ....................................... 72
Double Bass Switch ............................... 61
DT10/DT20 ............................................ 77
E
Edge shots ....................................... 17, 18
F
Factory Set ............................................ 75
Fast Blast ............................................... 49
Fast Blast Timer .................................... 73
Foot Close Position ............................... 65
Foot-close sounds ................................. 17
G
Gain .......................................................68
Groove Check ........................................38
H
Headphones ...........................................12
Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity ........................65
Hi-hat splash sounds .............................17
Hold Mode ..............................................61
I
Ignore Timing .........................................72
Initial Setup ............................................13
Input Sources .........................................29
Instrument ..............................................20
Instrument Volumes ...............................19
K
Kit .....................................................19, 20
Kit Lock ..................................................73
KU100 ....................................................76
L
Layers ....................................................57
LCD screen ............................................10
Looping a Song ......................................28
M
Master Equalizer ....................................74
Master Tuning ........................................74
Measure Break .......................................41
Menu Mode ............................................55
Metronome .............................................31
Metronome lights ...................................10
Metronome Output .................................74
MIDI Channel .........................................60
MIDI Control Change .............................63
MIDI Gate Time ......................................60
MIDI Note Number .................................60
MIDI Program Change ...........................63
Minimum Level .......................................68
Minimum Velocity ...................................69
Mixer settings .........................................57
Music Player ..........................................12
Muted Volume ........................................73
Muting ..............................................18, 27
N
Noise Filter .............................................69
Number display ......................................10
Number Display Function .......................74
O
Open sounds ..........................................17
P
Pad Control ............................................62
Pad Function ..........................................66
Pad Gate ................................................46
Pad Gate Group .....................................72
Pad set .....................................................7
Pad Songs .............................................29
Pad Type ................................................68
Part Mute ...............................................47
PCY90AT ...............................................76
PDF ..........................................................6
Play mode .............................................. 30
Power adaptor ....................................... 12
Practice songs ....................................... 26
Q
Quantize ................................................ 52
R
Rear Panel ............................................. 11
Recording .............................................. 51
Reference Manual ................................. 79
Reject Time ........................................... 69
Repeat Mode ......................................... 30
Restore .................................................. 75
Reverb Return ....................................... 62
Reverb Send (Source) ........................... 60
Reverb Send (Voices) ........................... 61
Reverb Type .......................................... 62
Rhythm Gate ......................................... 40
S
Sensitivity .............................................. 19
Separately Sold Accessories ................. 76
Snare ..................................................... 16
Snare Adjustment .................................. 62
Song ...................................................... 26
Speakers ............................................... 12
Stereo Panning ................................ 24, 59
Storing your settings .............................. 56
T
Tapping the Tempo ............................... 36
Tempo ................................................... 62
Tempo Up/Down .................................... 42
Timer ..................................................... 72
Training Mode ........................................ 38
Trigger input jacks ................................. 11
Trigger Setup ................................... 13, 66
Trigger Setup Link ................................. 63
Tuning .............................................. 22, 59
U
USB ....................................................... 79
USB-MIDI driver .................................... 79
User kits ................................................. 25
User songs ............................................ 51
V
Velocity Curve ....................................... 67
Voice ................................................ 20, 58
Volume ............................................ 15, 59
W
Wait Time .............................................. 69
Wave Voice ........................................... 21
Y
Y-cable .................................................. 11
Reference
[<]/[>]
90
DTX502 Owner’s Manual / Mode d’emploi
DTX502 Owners Manual / Mode d’emploi
91
(weee_eu_en_01)
(weee_eu_fr_01)
(standby)
(bottom_en_01)
(bottom_fr_01)
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic
products should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accor-
dance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.
By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative
effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste
disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dea
ler or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities
or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques.
Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électron-
iques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels.
Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroni-
ques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux
Directives 2002/96/EC.
En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la
sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pour-
ra
ient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprié des déchets.
Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroni-
ques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez
acheté les produits.
[Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne]
Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre
vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d'informations.
[Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne]
Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhait
ez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipe-
ments électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méth-
ode de traitement appropriée.
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også sel-
vom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta.
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit.
Yo u should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
Le numéro de modèle, le numéro de série, l'alimentation requise, etc., se trouvent sur ou près de la plaque signalétique du produit, située
dans la partie inférieure de l'unité. Notez le numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve
permanente de votre achat afin de faciliter l'identification du produit en cas de vol.
N° de modèle
N° de série
Yamaha web site
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation
211POGR*.*-01A0
Printed in Indonesia
ZE12040

Transcripción de documentos

English DTX502 Français DRUM TRIGGER MODULE CONVERTISSEUR DE SONS POUR BATTERIE Owner’s Manual Mode d’emploi EN FR Contents Welcome ......................................................................... 6 Product Manuals............................................................ 6 Setup First Steps ...................................................................... 7 Quick Start Guide .......................................................... 8 Choosing Drum Sounds .......................................................... 8 Playing Along with a Song....................................................... 8 Practicing with the Metronome ................................................ 8 Practicing in Training Mode ..................................................... 9 Recording Your Performances................................................. 9 Component Names & Functions ................................ 10 Control Panel..........................................................................10 Rear Panel .............................................................................11 Setting Up for Sound................................................... 12 Connecting the Power ........................................................... 12 Connecting Headphones or Speakers .................................. 12 Connecting a Music Player.................................................... 12 Turning On the Drum Module ................................................ 13 Initial Setup ........................................................................... 13 Quickly Disabling Auto Power-Off .......................................... 13 Turning Off the Drum Module ................................................ 14 Restoring the Default Settings............................................... 14 Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome ...................................... 32 Selecting a Click Set ............................................................. 32 Setting the Tempo ................................................................. 33 Setting the Time Signature.................................................... 33 Setting the Timer ................................................................... 33 Setting Individual Volumes .................................................... 34 Changing Sounds for All Subdivisions .................................. 34 Changing Sounds for Individual Subdivisions ....................... 35 Tuning Click-Set Sounds ....................................................... 36 Tapping the Tempo on the Pads............................................ 36 Storing a Customized Click Set ................................. 37 Practicing in Training Mode ....................................... 38 1. Groove Check .................................................................... 38 2. Rhythm Gate ..................................................................... 40 3. Measure Break .................................................................. 41 4. Tempo Up/Down................................................................ 42 5. Change Up ........................................................................ 44 6. Pad Gate ........................................................................... 46 7. Part Mute ........................................................................... 47 8. Fast Blast .......................................................................... 49 Recording Your Performances................................... 51 Getting Ready ....................................................................... 51 Recording .............................................................................. 52 Playing Back a Performance ................................................. 52 Naming a User Song............................................................. 53 Deleting a Recorded Performance ........................................ 54 Advanced Techniques Basic DTX502 Operations ........................................... 15 Setting Parameters using Menu Mode ...................... 55 Striking the Drum Pads ............................................... 16 Setting Procedure.................................................................. 56 Storing your settings.............................................................. 56 Snare..................................................................................... 16 Hi-hats................................................................................... 17 Cymbals ................................................................................ 18 Selecting & Playing a Kit............................................. 19 Selecting a Kit ....................................................................... 19 Adjusting Pad Sensitivity ....................................................... 19 Balancing Instrument Volumes.............................................. 19 Building Your Own Unique Kits ................................. 20 Assigning Voices to Instruments ........................................... 21 Tuning & Changing Cymbal Sizes ......................................... 22 Customizing Instrument Voices ............................................. 23 Adjusting Instrument Volumes............................................... 24 Adjusting the Stereo Panning of Instruments ........................ 24 Saving Customized Kits.............................................. 25 Performing with a Song .............................................. 26 Selecting a Song ................................................................... 26 Adjusting the Song Volume ................................................... 26 Adjusting the Song Tempo .................................................... 27 Muting a Song’s Drum Parts ................................................. 27 Looping a Song ..................................................................... 28 Playing with Count-In ............................................................ 28 Playing Pad Songs ................................................................ 29 Using the Metronome .................................................. 31 Starting & Stopping ............................................................... 31 Adjusting the Tempo.............................................................. 31 Setting the Overall Volume .................................................... 31 2 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Integrating Separately Sold Accessories.................. 76 Adding a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad ........................................... 76 Using a KU100 Kick Unit as a Kick Pedal ............................. 76 Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums ................. 77 Adding Drum Pads to an Acoustic Drum Set ........................ 77 Playing the DTX502 Using Acoustic Drums .......................... 77 Mounting the DTX502 on a Hi-Hat Stand.............................. 78 Connecting to a Computer ......................................... 79 Making Connections.............................................................. 79 DTX502 Reference Manual................................................... 79 Reference Error Messages............................................................ 80 Troubleshooting .......................................................... 81 Data List ....................................................................... 83 Specifications .............................................................. 88 Index ............................................................................. 89 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. 92-BP (bottom) Model Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guar- antee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Address : Telephone : Type of Equipment : Model Name : Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 714-522-9011 DRUM TRIGGER MODULE DTX502 * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. (FCC DoC) DTX502 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 88) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. DMI-5 4 DTX502 Owner’s Manual • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand/rack specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. 1/2 Connections Handling caution • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.  Optional Pads Within this Owner’s Manual, the optional external pads that may be connected to the drum module are referred to by model name. Please note that these model names were up-to-date as of printing of this manual. Details regarding any subsequently released models will be made available via the following web site. http://www.yamaha.com/ DMI-5 2/2 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 5 Welcome Thank you for purchasing a Yamaha DTX502 Electronic Drum Module. In order to get the most out of your new instrument, please be sure to read this owner’s manual carefully. And after doing so, be sure to store this manual in a safe place so that you can refer back to it again as needed. Product Manuals  Owner’s Manual (this booklet)—Setup, Basic Techniques, Advanced Techniques, and Reference sections. Setup: Describes how to get your DTX502 drum module set up for playing and making initial settings. Basic Techniques: Describes the basic techniques used when operating and playing the DTX502. Advanced Techniques: Describes the setting of parameters and other more advanced modes of use. Reference: Describes troubleshooting techniques and contains other reference materials.  Reference Manual *: The Reference Manual is not bundled together with the drum module. See page 79 for more details. The Reference Manual for the DTX502 is made available as a PDF document and contains the following. • Instructions on how to transfer kit data, song data, and audio data from your computer to the drum module. • Reference material that will prove useful when making music using the drum module and a computer • MIDI-related reference information  Using PDF Manuals The Reference Manual for your DTX502 is made available in digital format as a PDF document. As such, a computer and suitable software will be required in order to read it. We recommend that Adobe® Reader® be used for this purpose as it allows you to quickly and easily search for keywords, to print out specific sections, and to conveniently jump from page to page by clicking embedded links. Keyword searching and link-based navigation in particular are extremely useful functions available only with digital-type documents. The most-recent version of Adobe® Reader® can be downloaded from the following web page. http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/ Package contents • Power adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Module holder • Module-holder screw (x2) • Owner’s Manual (this booklet) 6 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Setup First Steps Setup 1. Open the packages to reveal their contents. • DTX502 Drum Trigger Module • Rack (i.e., RS502) • Pad set (i.e., DTP522, DTP532, DTP542, or DTP562) 2. Assemble the parts • Assemble the rack.  Refer to the Owner’s Manual that came with your rack (i.e., RS502). • Mount the pads and the DTX502 module on the rack.  Refer to the Assembly Manual that came with your pad set. 3. Make the required connections. • Connect the pads and the DTX502 using the cable provided.  Refer to the Assembly Manual that came with your pad set. • Connect the power adaptor to the DTX502 module and turn on the module.  See page 12 of this booklet. 4. Complete the initial setup process. • See Initial Setup on page 13. 120 Select your kit DtX562K 5. Play your electronic drum kit. • Basic techniques used when operating and playing the electronic drum kit are described in the Basic Techniques section (pages 15 to 54). • More complex methods are described in the Advanced Techniques section (pages 55 to 79). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 7 Setup Quick Start Guide Choosing Drum Sounds (page 19) q Press the [KIT] button. w Turn the Data Dial to select a different drum kit. 120 You can also assign sounds to individual pads. (See page 20.) w q Playing Along with a Song (page 26) q Press the [SONG] button. w Turn the Data Dial to select a different song. 120 q e Press the [ ] button to start playback of the song. w To mute the song’s drum parts, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button once again. e Practicing with the Metronome (page 31) q Press the [ ] button. w To adjust the tempo, hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial. 120 w w 8 DTX502 Owner’s Manual q Setup Quick Start Guide Practicing in Training Mode (page 38) q Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] button. w Turn the Data Dial to select one of the drum module’s training options. 120 e Press the flashing button ([ ] or [ ]) when you are ready to go. w q q Recording Your Performances Eight different training options are available on your DTX502. See page 38 for more details of each. (page 51) q Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SONG] button. w Press the [ recording. 120 we q q ] button to start e When you are finished drumming, press the [ ] button to stop recording. You can use the [ ] button to start and stop the playback of your recording. (See page 52.) DTX502 Owner’s Manual 9 Setup Component Names & Functions Control Panel q w e 120 y u i o !4 q[ r wxyz{|} drums !1 !2 !0 !3 !5 ] (Standby/On) button (page 13) Use this button to turn the drum module on and off. w Metronome lights When the metronome is playing, the red light flashes on the start of each measure; the green light flashes on every other beat. e Number display The number display is used to indicate the tempo, mode-specific numbers, and timer values. (See page 74.) r LCD screen The LCD screen presents information needed to operate the DTX502. t VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons (page 15) These buttons are used to adjust the overall DTX502 volume—that is, the volume of sound output via the OUTPUT and [PHONES] jacks. y [KIT] button (page 19) • Press the [KIT] button to open the page for selecting different drum kits. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] button to access Training Mode. • You can also immediately silence all sounds by pressing the [KIT] button. u [SONG] button (page 26) • Press the [SONG] button to open the page for selecting different songs. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SONG] button to put the drum module on standby for recording. 10 DTX502 Owner’s Manual t i[ ] button (page 26) • Press the [ ] button to start and stop song playback. • You can also start and stop training using the [ ] button. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button to mute and unmute a song’s drum parts. o [SHIFT] button To access the setting area or function indicated above any button, press it while holding down the [SHIFT] button. !0 Data Dial • Turn the Data Dial to change the value selected by the flashing cursor. To increase values, turn it clockwise and viceversa. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial to change the tempo. !1 [<]/[>] buttons • Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the flashing cursor between on-screen items. If a setting area has more parameters than will fit on a single page, these buttons can be used to move between the area’s pages. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [<]/[>] buttons to select the pad to be set. Setup Component Names & Functions !2 [ !4 [PHONES] jack ] button (page 31) • Press the [ ] button to start and stop the built-in metronome. • In Training Mode, you can use the [ ] button to start and stop practice sessions. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button to access the area for advanced metronome settings. !3 [SAVE/ENTER] button • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button when you want to store your data. • Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/ ENTER] button to access Menu Mode for advanced DTX502 settings. Use this standard audio jack to connect a pair of stereo headphones. !5 [AUX IN] jack (page 12) The Auxiliary Input stereo mini-jack is used to input audio from an external source into the DTX502. For example, you can use this jack to connect a portable music player, a CD player, or another similar device and play along with your favorite tunes. Rear Panel !6 !8 !7 !6 Trigger input jacks ([qSNARE] to [oHI-HAT]) These trigger input jacks are used to connect pads and/or drum triggers (such as the Yamaha DT10 or DT20) to your DTX502 so that it may produce sounds in response to the trigger signals they output. • [qSNARE] This jack supports three-zone pads and pad controllers. • [wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1], [rTOM3/!2], and [uKICK/i] • Each of these jacks comprises a pair of mono trigger inputs. Using a separately-sold Y-cable*, you can route trigger signals from mono pads into inputs i, !0, !1, and !2. (*: For converting a stereo plug into two mono jacks; see the illustration below.) When a KP65 Kick Pad is connected here, an additional mono pad can be connected via the input jack on the back of the kick pad. • These jacks also support dual piezo pads. !9 @0 @1 !7 [HI-HAT CONTROL] jack This jack is used to connect an HH65 Hi-hat Controller or the [HI-HAT CONTROL] output jack of an RHH135 Real Hi-hat Pad. !8 [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 79) This terminal is used to connect the DTX502 to a computer’s USB terminal via a USB cable. !9 Cord clip (page 12) Wrap the power adaptor’s DC cord around this clip to prevent accidental unplugging during use. @0 [ ] connector (page 12) Use this connector for the power adaptor that came with your drum module. @1 OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks (page 12) These standard jacks are used to output audio from the DTX502. If mono output is required, only the [L/MONO] jack should be connected. • [tRIDE] and [yCRASH] These trigger input jacks support three-zone pads • [oHI-HAT] This trigger input jack supports three-zone pads and stereo pads. Y-cable Mono audio jack Stereo audio plug Mono audio jack DTX502 Owner’s Manual 11 Setup Setting Up for Sound Connecting the Power Connecting a Music Player 1. Ensure that your drum module is turned off (i.e., nothing is visible on the LCD screen). 2. Insert the power adaptor’s DC plug into the [ ] connector on the rear panel. 3. Hook the power adaptor’s DC cord around the cord clip to prevent it from being accidentally pulled out. You can connect a portable music player or another similar source of audio to your drum module via the [AUX IN] (auxiliary input) stereo mini-jack. This makes it possible to play along with your favorite tunes. NOTICE • Whenever connecting other devices, ensure that the cables you use have plugs that match the input or output connectors on those devices. • Before making connections, furthermore, you should also turn the volume on the other devices fully down. • When all connections have been made, use each device’s volume controller to balance its output with that of the drum module. Cord clip Power adaptor’s DC cord  Control panel CAUTION Excessive bending can damage the power adaptor cord and create a fire hazard. Ensure, therefore, that the power cord is not bent at an extreme angle when wrapped around the clip. 4. Standard 1/4” stereo-audio jack 1/8” stereo-mini to stereo-mini cable Plug the power adaptor’s AC power cord into a domestic wall socket. WARNING Use only the specified adaptor. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. Headphones Portable music player, etc. CAUTION Even when the power of this instrument is in the Standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.  Rear panel Standard 1/4” mono-audio jack Connecting Headphones or Speakers Your DTX502 does not feature built-in speakers. In order to hear it, therefore, you will need to connect headphones or a DTXseries monitor system, such as the MS40DR. You can adjust the output volume using the VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons on the control panel.  Connecting headphones Plug your headphones into the [PHONES] jack (for standard stereo audio).  Connecting speakers Connect your speakers to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks (for standard mono audio). CAUTION To prevent hearing loss, avoid using headphones at a high volume for extended periods of time. 12 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Powered speakers Setup Setting Up for Sound Turning On the Drum Module 1. If you have connected your drum module to other audio devices such as powered speakers, ensure that the volume on those devices is turned down fully. 2. Press the [ Using the Data Dial, select how long the DTX502 should wait before turning off automatically, and then press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. Auto Power Off timer= 30min ] (Standby/On) button. Initial Setup Settings When you turn on your DTX502 for the first time, the Initial Setup page will be displayed. On this page, you will be required to specify the following.  Your drum kit’s model number When you specify the model number, the DTX502 will automatically optimize the trigger output levels for all of your pads.  Auto Power-Off time The Auto Power-Off function automatically turns off the DTX502 after a certain period of inactivity. This helps to conserve energy should you forget to turn it off yourself. 1. 2. Identify your drum kit using the Data Dial and press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. off (i.e., Auto Power-Off function disabled), 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 60min, and 120min NOTICE • Any unsaved changes to parameters will be lost when the drum module is turned off by the Auto Power-Off function. Remember to store modified settings regularly. • In certain modes of operation, the Auto Power-Off function will not turn off the drum module when the set time has elapsed. We recommend, therefore, that you always turn off the drum module manually when you are finished using it. • If you expect your DTX502 to be inactive for a certain length of time while connected to other audio equipment, we recommend that you turn the volume on the other equipment fully down. Alternatively, you can disable the Auto Power-Off function to ensure that the drum module stays on. NOTE • Settings for the Auto Power-Off function do not represent exact times and there may be some variation. Select your kit DtX562K • By default, the Auto Power-Off time is set to 30 minutes. • You can change the Auto Power-Off setting at any time after completing Initial Setup. For details, see the description of the Auto Power-Off page from Menu Mode (page 75). Quickly Disabling Auto Power-Off Settings DTX522K, DTX532K, DTX542K, DTX562K, DTX500K, DTX520K, DTX530K, DTX540K, DTX550K, DTX560K, DTXP4STD (DTXPRESS IV STD SET), DTXP4SP (DTXPRESS IV SP SET), DTXPL (DTXPLORER), DrumTrig, and UserTrig To quickly disable the Auto Power-Off function, turn on the drum module while holding down the [ ] button. Hold NOTE • Your drum kit’s model number is indicated on the box it came in. • You can change the specified drum kit at any time after completing Initial Setup. For details, see the description of the Trigger Setup page from Menu Mode (page 66). Auto power off disabled. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 13 Setup Setting Up for Sound Turning Off the Drum Module 1. If you have connected your DTX502 to other audio equipment, ensure that the volume on those devices is turned down fully. 2. Press the [ ] (Standby/On) button. Restoring the Default Settings Your drum module’s default settings—collectively known as the Factory Set—can be conveniently restored at any time if you have accidentally overwritten them or wish to delete all of your own settings. To do so, use the Factory Set function as follows. NOTICE When you reset parameters as described below, any changes you have made to them will be lost. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that they contain no irreplaceable settings. The Shutdown page will be displayed on the LCD screen, and the drum module will turn off. 1. Press the [ DTX502. 2. Turn the DTX502 back on while holding down the [<] and [>] buttons. >>> Shutdown <<< Please wait. ] (Standby/On) button and turn off the NOTICE The drum module automatically stores its system settings before turning off. For this reason, please do not unplug the power adaptor until the LCD screen is no longer lit. Unsaved settings from kits, trigger setups, and the like will be lost when the drum module is turned off. Be sure to store any modified settings before doing so. Hold The Factory Set page will be displayed on the LCD screen, and the drum module’s default settings will be restored. Factory Set initialized. After this, the Initial Setup page will be displayed (page 13). 14 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Basic DTX502 Operations Basic Techniques 120 >Pad1 ” Splash= 30 For changing values ‚ For adjusting the volume For selecting the parameter to set  Adjusting the volume NOTE Press the VOLUME [+] button to increase the volume. Press the VOLUME [–] button to decrease the volume. • To adjust the song volume, hold down the [SONG] button and press the VOLUME [+] or [–] button accordingly (page 26). • To adjust the metronome volume, hold down the [ ] button and press the VOLUME [+] or [–] button accordingly (page 31).  Selecting the parameter to set Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select different parameters on the screen by moving the flashing cursor. A “‚” symbol at the bottom-right of the screen indicates that you can move right to another page. Similarly, a “”” symbol at the bottom-left of the screen indicates that you can move left to another page.  Changing values NOTE Move the flashing cursor to the parameter you want to edit, and then turn the Data Dial to change its value. Turn it clockwise to increase values and vice-versa. Decrease values To adjust the tempo, hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial (page 31). Increase values DTX502 Owner’s Manual 15 Basic Techniques Striking the Drum Pads Snare When using a three-zone snare pad such as the XP80, you can produce three distinct sounds (i.e., head, open rim, and closed rim) depending on where you strike it, much the same as if you were playing an acoustic snare. Closed rim shots (Rim 2) Head shots Open rim shots (Rim 1)  Head shots Striking the main surface of the pad produces a head shot sound.  Open rim shots Striking the open-rim zone produces an open rim-shot sound. 16 DTX502 Owner’s Manual  Closed rim shots (cross sticking) Striking the closed-rim zone produces a closed rim-shot sound. Basic Techniques Striking the Drum Pads Hi-hats When using a two-zone hi-hat pad such as the RHH135, you can produce a number of distinct sounds, much the same as if you were playing an acoustic hi-hat cymbal. Edge shots  Open and closed sounds • You can produce an open hi-hat sound by striking the hihat pad with the hi-hat controller’s pedal not depressed. • You can produce a closed hi-hat sound by striking the hihat pad with the hi-hat controller’s pedal depressed. • Using a hi-hat pedal, you can recreate the sound of a closing hi-hat.  Bow shots Striking the main surface of the hi-hat pad (i.e., the bow section located between the cup and edge) produces a bow shot sound.  Edge shots Striking the outside edge of the hi-hat pad produces an edge shot sound. Bow shots  Foot-close sounds You can depress the hi-hat controller’s pedal to create a foot-close sound without having to strike the hi-hat pad.  Hi-hat splash sounds Depressing the hi-hat controller’s pedal and then immediately releasing it produces a hi-hat splash sound.  Cup shots (PCY100 only) When using a PCY100 as your hi-hat, you can produce a cut shot sound by striking the cup section of the pad. In order to do so, you will need to set the cup switch (CUP SW) on the rear of the pad to the ON position. OUTPUT CUP SW DTX502 Owner’s Manual 17 Basic Techniques Striking the Drum Pads Cymbals When using a three-zone cymbal pad such as the PCY135, you can produce a number of distinct sounds, much the same as if you were playing an acoustic ride cymbal. Bell shots (Rim 2) Edge shots (Rim 1)  Bow shots Striking the main surface of the cymbal pad (i.e., the bow section located between the cup and edge) produces a bow shot sound. Bow shots  Choking Grabbing the edge of a cymbal pad immediately after striking it will silence the sound being produced.  Edge shots Striking the outside edge of the cymbal pad produces an edge shot sound.  Muting Striking the pad while holding the edge will produce a muted sound.  Bell shots Striking the cup produces a bell shot sound. 18 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Selecting & Playing a Kit In terms of the DTX502, a “kit” is a full set of drum-sound assignments for all of the pads. Your drum module comes with 50 different drum and percussion kits already set up. KIT1 Selecting a Kit 1. Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area. Verify that “KIT1” is displayed at the top-left of the screen. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select a different kit. NOTE Your kit selection will be retained even when the DTX502 is turned off. KIt1 01:Maple Custom‚ Kit number Kit name 3. Play the pads and see how the kit sounds. NOTE With certain drum kits, the Pad Song function (page 29) will automatically start playing a song when you strike a pad. Adjusting Pad Sensitivity A pad’s sensitivity determines how the loudness (or power) of its drum sounds changes depending on how hard you strike it. You can adjust the sensitivity of all pads as follows to make them more accurately reflect the dynamics of your drumming. Hold down the [KIT] button and press either the VOLUME [+] or [–] button. aKit Gain=100% b cÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇd NOTE • Adjusting the sensitivity as shown on the left affects the entire kit. • If you wish to set sensitivities on an individual pad basis, see the description of the Gain page from Menu Mode (page 68). Hold • Pressing the VOLUME [+] button increases the gain setting, making all of the pads more sensitive. This means that louder sounds can be more easily produced with softer drumming. • Pressing the VOLUME [–] button decreases the gain setting, making all of the pads less sensitive. This means that louder sounds can only be produced by drumming hard. Balancing Instrument Volumes If necessary, you can change the volumes of individual instruments (page 20). For example, you may need to lower the volume of the kick while increasing the volume of the snare. For details on how to do so, see the description of the Mixer settings page from Menu Mode (page 57). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 19 Basic Techniques Building Your Own Unique Kits It’s easy to build your own unique drum kits with the DTX502—simply change the drum sounds assigned to the individual pads on pages KIT2 to KIT6 as described below. NOTE The KIT1 page is used only for selecting different kits. Tip Voices, instruments, and kits Closed rim shots Pads such as the snare, hi-hat, and cymbals (pages 16 to 18) have been designed to trigger different voices (or sounds) depending on the zone of the pad that is struck (see Input Sources on page 29). In terms of the DTX502, an “instrument” is a collection of the voices assigned to the various zones of a specific pad. A kit comprises a full set of instruments—one for each pad. Head shots Open rim shots NOTICE When any of a kit’s parameters have been changed but not yet saved, an asterisk (*) will appear beside the page name at the top-left of the screen. The asterisk will disappear when you save your settings. (See page 25.) If you select another kit without saving your changes, they will be lost. KIt2* Snare ”S01:MapleCustm‚ To edit a kit, you must first carry out the following two steps. 1. Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select the kit you wish to edit. KIt1 01:Maple Custom‚ The changes that can be made on each of pages KIT2 to KIT6 are described below. 20 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Building Your Own Unique Kits KIT2 Assigning Voices to Instruments 1. Navigate to the KIT2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. KIt2 Snare ”S01:MapleCustm‚ the pad whose instrument voice you wish to 2. Strike change. necessary, move the cursor to the voice category 3. Ifusing the [<]/[>] buttons. NOTE As an alternative to selecting a pad by striking it, you can change the current selection by pressing the [<]/[>] buttons with the [SHIFT] button held down. KIt2 Snare ”S01:MapleCustm‚ necessary, turn the Data Dial to select a different 4. Ifvoice category. Voices are organized into the following categories on the DTX502. K Kick H Hi-hat S Snare P Percussion T Tom E Effect C Cymbal W Wave Voice NOTE The term “Wave Voice” refers to an audio file transferred from a computer to your DTX502 via USB (page 79). the cursor to the voice number using the [<]/[>] 5. Move buttons. KIt2* Snare ”S01:MapleCustm‚ 6. Turn the Data Dial to select a different voice. NOTE • When voice number 0 (“No Assign”) is selected for an instrument, it will not produce any sound when struck. • To assign a voice to a specific zone, strike the zone while holding down the [SHIFT] button. For details, see Tip: Input Sources on page 29. • Two different voices can be simultaneously assigned to each pad or zone. For details, see the description of the Layers page from Menu Mode (page 57). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 21 Basic Techniques Building Your Own Unique Kits KIT3 Tuning & Changing Cymbal Sizes 1. Navigate to the KIT3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. the pad whose instrument tuning or cymbal size 2. Strike you wish to change. 3. Turn the Data Dial to change the tuning or cymbal size. The content of the page will vary depending on the voice category selected for the instrument in question.  Kick (K), Snare (S), Tom (T), Percussion (P), Effect (E), or Wave Voice (W): KIt3* Kick ” tuning=+ 0.0 ‚ Raise or lower the parameter value to change the tuning (i.e., pitch) of the voice.  Cymbal (C) or Hi-hat (H): KIt3* Ride ” Size=+ 0 ‚ Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the cymbal size. 22 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE As an alternative to selecting a pad by striking it, you can change the current selection by pressing the [<]/[>] buttons with the [SHIFT] button held down. Basic Techniques Building Your Own Unique Kits KIT4 Customizing Instrument Voices 1. Navigate to the KIT4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. the pad whose instrument voice you wish to cus2. Strike tomize. 3. Turn the Data Dial to customize the voice. NOTE As an alternative to selecting a pad by striking it, you can change the current selection by pressing the [<]/[>] buttons with the [SHIFT] button held down. The way in which the voice can be customized varies depending on the voice category selected for the instrument in question.  Kick (K), Snare (S), and Tom (T): KIt4* Kick ” Muffling=+ 0 ‚ Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the degree of muffling (i.e., head muting).  Cymbal (C): KIt4* Ride ” Sustain=+ 0 ‚ Raise or lower the parameter value to change the cymbal’s sustain time (i.e., how quickly the sound decays to silence).  Hi-hat (H): NOTE KIt4* Hihat ” Clutch=+ 0 ‚ The hi-hat clutch position setting applies to all kits. Raise or lower the parameter value to simulate the effect of changing the hi-hat’s clutch position. The smaller the setting, the quicker an open hi-hat sound will decay to silence.  Percussion (P), Effect (E), or Wave Voice (W): KIt4* Pad12 ” Decay=+ 0 ‚ Raise or lower the parameter value to change how quickly the sound decays to silence. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 23 Basic Techniques Building Your Own Unique Kits KIT5 Adjusting Instrument Volumes 1. Navigate to the KIT5 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. the pad whose instrument volume you wish to 2. Strike adjust. 3. Turn the data dial to change the instrument volume. NOTE As an alternative to selecting a pad by striking it, you can change the current selection by pressing the [<]/[>] buttons with the [SHIFT] button held down. KIt5* Snare ” Volume=110 ‚ KIT6 Adjusting the Stereo Panning of Instruments 1. Navigate to the KIT6 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. the pad whose instrument panning you wish to 2. Strike change. 3. Turn the Data Dial to change the pan setting. KIt6* Snare ” Pan= C 24 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE As an alternative to selecting a pad by striking it, you can change the current selection by pressing the [<]/[>] buttons with the [SHIFT] button held down. Basic Techniques Saving Customized Kits You can now save your customized kit as one of the drum module’s User kits, which are numbered 51 to 100. User kits are retained in memory even when the DTX502 is turned off. 1. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed. KIt saVe to 51 :[Maple Custom] the Data Dial to select the User kit (51 to 100) in 2. Turn which you wish to save your settings. 3. If necessary, name your new drum kit. Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and then turn the Data Dial to change it. NOTE Customized kits cannot be saved to the drum module’s Preset kits, which are numbered 1 to 50. NOTICE When you save new settings to a User kit, its current settings will be overwritten. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the kit in question contains no irreplaceable settings. KIt saVe to 51 :[Oaple Custom] 4. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again. KIt saVe to 51 Are you sure? To cancel the process without saving any settings, press the [ ] button. 5. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to save your settings. User kit data can be transferred between your DTX502 and a computer via USB. For details, refer to Connecting to a Computer (page 79) and the Reference Manual (PDF). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 25 Basic Techniques Performing with a Song Your DTX502 comes complete with a full complement of practice songs. Covering a wide range of genres, they provide a convenient, enjoyable way to practice drumming. Songs are selected on the SONG1 page. Press the [SONG] button to open the SONG1 page. SONG1 01:Demo Song number ‚ Song name SONG1 Selecting a Song that “SONG1” is displayed at the top-left of the 1. Verify screen. 2. Turn the Data Dial to choose a song to play along with. 3. Press the [ ] button. The song will start to play. You can stop the song by pressing the [ again. ] button once Adjusting the Song Volume 1. Press the [ ] button to start the song. adjust the song’s volume, hold down the [SONG] 2. To button and press either the VOLUME [+] or [–] button. Hold 26 DTX502 Owner’s Manual aSong Volume=13b cÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇd NOTE • Your song selection will be retained even when the DTX502 is turned off. • The most appropriate drum kit is pre-assigned to each of the drum module’s songs, so whenever you select another song, the current kit will also change. You can, however, use the Kit Lock function to prevent this if you wish to keep the current kit when practicing with different songs. (See page 73.) Basic Techniques Performing with a Song Adjusting the Song Tempo 1. Press the [ ] button to start the song. adjust the tempo, hold down the [SHIFT] button and 2. To turn the Data Dial. NOTE • The tempo can be freely set between 30 and 300 BPM. • You can also use the Tap Tempo function (page 36) to set the tempo by striking pads. Hold Muting a Song’s Drum Parts 1. Press the [ ] button to start the song. down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 2. Hold ton to mute and unmute the song’s drum parts. ] but- When the drum parts have been muted, the symbol “ M ” will be displayed on-screen. SONG1 01:Demo M ‚ NOTE You can also mute and unmute individual drum and accompaniment parts. For details, see the description of Part Mute from Training Mode (page 47). Hold DTX502 Owner’s Manual 27 Basic Techniques Performing with a Song SONG2 Looping a Song On the SONG2 page, you can set the current song to be played repeatedly in looped fashion. 1. Press the [SONG] button. 2. Navigate to the SONG2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. SONG2 ” Loop=off ‚ 3. Turn the Data Dial to change the loop setting. • When Loop is set to “off”, the song will stop automatically when it has played to the end. • When Loop is set to “on”, the song will start again from the beginning when it has played to the end. NOTE The loop setting for User songs is retained even when the DTX502 is turned off. SONG3 Playing with Count-In On the SONG3 page, you can set whether or not you would like to be counted in before the song starts. 1. Press the [SONG] button. 2. Navigate to the SONG3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. SONG3 ”PlayCount=off ‚ 3. Turn the Data Dial to change the count-in setting. • When PlayCount is set to “off”, you will not be counted in. • When PlayCount is set to “on”, you will be counted in over two measures. 28 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE The count-in setting applies to all songs. Basic Techniques Performing with a Song Playing Pad Songs The term “pad song” refers to songs that can be played by striking a specific drum pad. In the same way as snare sounds are produced by striking a pad to which a snare voice has been assigned, you can start and stop the playback of pad songs by striking the pads to which they are assigned.  Assigning a pad song to a pad NOTICE When any of a kit’s parameters have been changed but not yet saved, an asterisk (*) will appear beside the page name at the top-left of the screen. The asterisk will disappear when you save your settings. (See page 25.) 1. Press the [KIT] button to access the Kit area. 2. Using the Data Dial, select the kit you wish to edit. KIt1 01:Maple Custom‚ 3. Navigate to the KIT2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. KIt2 Snare ”S01:MapleCustm‚ select an input source, hold down the [SHIFT] 4. To button and strike the corresponding pad or zone. Tip Pad songs are assigned to input sources, not to instruments. NOTE Input Sources Each zone of an instrument (page 20) corresponds to one of the drum module’s input sources. The snare instrument, for example, combines three distinct input sources—the head, the open rim, and the closed rim. As shown in the table, only the snare, the ride cymbal, the crash cymbal, and the hihat have more than one input source. Instrument Input sources Instrument Crash snare OpenRim Snare snare(off) Head (*1) ride Edge ride Cup crash Edge hihat Open (*1) hihat EdgeOpen hihat CupOpen (*2) snare(off) ClosedRim (*1) ride Bow Input sources crash Cup snare ClosedRim snare(off) OpenRim Tom 1, Tom 2, Tom 3, Kick, Pad 8, Pad 10, Pad 11, and Pad 12 each have only one input source. crash Bow snare Head Ride NOTE HiHat hihat Close hihat EdgeClose hihat CupClose (*2) hihat FootClose hihat FootSplash *1: These input sources apply when the Snares parameter from the KitC6 page (page 62) is set to “off”. *2: These input sources apply when using a PCY100 as a hi-hat. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 29 Basic Techniques Performing with a Song necessary, move the cursor to the voice category 5. Ifusing the [<]/[>] buttons. KIt2 snareHd ”S01:MapleCustm‚ the Data Dial to select “ e ” (pad song) as the 6. Turn voice category. KIt2* snareHd ”Ö01:Demo ≥‚ the cursor to the song number using the [<]/ 7. Move [>] buttons. KIt2* snareHd ”Ö01:Demo ≥‚ 8. Turn the Data Dial to choose a pad song. See the Data List section (page 83) for details of the available pad songs. KIt2* snareHd ”Ö39:Funk C ≥‚ Play mode  Setting the pad song’s Repeat mode the cursor to the Repeat mode symbol using 1. Move the [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Turn the Data Dial to change the mode setting. ≥ μ : Normal play : Repeat play—that is, the song starts again from the beginning after playing to the end  Setting the pad song’s Play mode the cursor to the Play mode symbol using 1. Move the [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Turn the Data Dial to change the mode setting. Â Ê Á 30 DTX502 Owner’s Manual • Pad songs are played back independent of the main song selected on the SONG1 page. • Pad songs cannot be played when recording a song or when practicing in Training Mode.  Setting Repeat and Play modes Repeat mode NOTE : The pad song will start or stop accordingly whenever the pad is struck. : The pad song will play one measure at a time whenever the pad is struck. : If any other pad song of the same type is already playing, it will be stopped before playing the pad song selected here. Basic Techniques Using the Metronome Playing your electronic drum kit along with the built-in metronome is a great way to perfect your rhythm. Starting & Stopping Press the [ ] button to start the metronome. • The red metronome light (left) flashes on the start of each measure; the green light (right) flashes on every other beat. • The current metronome tempo is shown by the number display. Flashes red Press the [ Flashes green ] button once again to stop the metronome. Adjusting the Tempo Hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial. Hold Setting the Overall Volume Hold down the [ or [–] button. ] button and press either the VOLUME [+] NOTE The overall volume setting applies to all click sets. You can set the overall metronome volume between “0” (off) and “16” (loudest). aClickVolume=10b cÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇd Hold DTX502 Owner’s Manual 31 Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome This section describes how to make advanced metronome settings. A total of six pages (CLK1 to CLK6) are used for this purpose. NOTICE When any of a click set’s parameters have been changed but not yet stored, an asterisk (*) will appear beside the page name at the top-left of the screen. The asterisk will disappear when you store your settings. (See page 37.) CLK1* 01:User ∫ 4/4 ⁄=123‚ The individual parameters that can be changed on pages CLK1 to CLK6 will now be described. The following four metronome settings can be made on the CLK1 page. • • • • Click set selection Tempo Time signature Timer To open the CLK1 page, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ Metronome area (first page) Hold CLK1* 01:User Metronome timer ] button. Time signature ∫ 4/4 ⁄=123‚ Click set number: Click set name Tempo CLK1 Selecting a Click Set The term “click set” is used to describe a collection of metronome settings. You can customize these click sets as necessary, and your DTX502 can store up to 30 of them. The following describes how to recall a previously stored click set. the cursor to the click set number using the [<]/ 1. Move [>] buttons. 2. Turn the Data Dial to choose a click set. Click sets are numbered 1 to 30. Whenever you change metronome parameters as described on the following pages, it is wise to store them. Details on how to do so can be found in Storing a Customized Click Set (page 37). 32 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE Your click-set selection will be retained even when the DTX502 is turned off. Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome CLK1 Setting the Tempo the cursor to the number to the right of the “ ⁄= ” 1. Move symbol using the [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Turn the Data Dial to change the tempo setting. The tempo can be freely set between 30 and 300 BPM. NOTE • If you hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial, you can change the tempo without having to move the cursor to the number to the right of the “ ⁄= ” symbol. • You can also use the Tap Tempo function (page 36) to set the tempo by striking pads. CLK1 Setting the Time Signature the cursor to the time signature display using the 1. Move [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Turn the Data Dial to set the time signature. The available time signature settings are 1/4 to 16/4, 1/8 to 16/8, and 1/16 to 16/16. CLK1 Setting the Timer By setting the metronome’s timer, you can have it turn off automatically after the set time has elapsed. the cursor to the “ ∫ ” symbol using the [<]/[>] 1. Move buttons. The “ ∫ ” symbol will be replaced by a number. 2. Turn the Data Dial to set the metronome timer. NOTE • The metronome timer setting applies to all click sets. • The metronome timer does not operate when in Training Mode. The time can be freely set between 0 seconds (i.e., the timer is disabled) and 600 seconds in units of 30 seconds. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 33 Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome CLK2 Setting Individual Volumes On the CLK2 page, you can set the volumes of individual metronome subdivisions. down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 1. Hold to access the Metronome area. ] button 2. Navigate to the CLK2 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. CLK2* A˘=9 ¤=9 ” ‹=0 ßß=0 Œ=0 ‚ the cursor to “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, or “ Œ ” 3. Move so that you may adjust the volume for that subdivision. the data dial to adjust the volume of the selected 4. Turn subdivision. The volume for each subdivision may be freely adjusted between “0” (silent) and “9” (loudest). The following shows the timing of the individual metronome subdivisions when there are four beats per measure. A˘ ¤ ‹ ßß Œ CLK3 Changing Sounds for All Subdivisions On the CLK3 page, you can change the sounds for all metronome subdivisions (i.e., “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”). down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 1. Hold to access the Metronome area. ] button 2. Navigate to the CLK3 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. CLK3* Sound ” 1:Metronome 34 DTX502 Owner’s Manual ‚ NOTE “ A˘ ”, “ á ”, “ ‹ ”, and “ ßß ” subdivision volumes can be set when the time signature is set to 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8, or 15/8. Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome 3. Turn the Data Dial to choose a metronome sound set. The following six sets are available on your DTX502. 1 Metronome1 4 Stick 2 Metronome2 5 Human 1 3 Cowbell 6 Human 2 CLK4 Changing Sounds for Individual Subdivisions On the CLK4 page, you can freely assign different sounds to each of the metronome subdivisions (i.e., “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”). down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 1. Hold to access the Metronome area. ] button 2. Navigate to the CLK4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. CLK4* Sound=A˘ ”E01:Click1 Acc‚ 3. Move the cursor to the subdivision symbol to the right of “Sound=” (i.e., “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, or “ Œ ”), and turn the Data Dial to select the one to set. the cursor to the sound category, and if neces4. Move sary, turn the Data Dial to select a different category. NOTE “ ë ” can be selected only for “ A˘ ” and “ ¤ ”. Voices are organized into the following categories on the DTX502. K Kick P Percussion S Snare E Effect T Tom W Wave Voice C Cymbal ë Spoken Count H Hi-hat the cursor to the sound number, and if necessary, 5. Move turn the Data Dial to select a different sound. NOTE When voice number 0 (“No Assign”) is selected, the corresponding metronome subdivision will not produce any sound. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 35 Basic Techniques Customizing the Metronome CLK5 Tuning Click-Set Sounds On the CLK5 page, you can tune the sounds for each of the metronome subdivisions (i.e., “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, and “ Œ ”). down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 1. Hold to access the Metronome area. ] button 2. Navigate to the CLK5 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. CLK5* Sound=A˘ ” tune=+ 0.0 ‚ 3. Move the cursor to the subdivision symbol to the right of “Sound=” (i.e., “ A˘ ”, “ ¤ ”, “ ‹ ”, “ ßß ”, or “ Œ ”), and turn the Data Dial to select the one to set. the cursor to the number to the right of “Tune=”, 4. Move and turn the Data Dial to change the tuning. Metronome subdivision sounds can be tuned between -24.0 and +24.0 semitones. CLK6 Tapping the Tempo on the Pads On the CLK6 page, you can use the Tap Tempo function to set the tempo by striking pads. down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ 1. Hold to access the Metronome area. ] button 2. Navigate to the CLK6 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. CLK6* tAP tEMPO ” ⁄=120 3. Strike a pad at least three times at the desired tempo. The tapped tempo will be displayed on-screen. 36 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Storing a Customized Click Set After you have customized a click set (as described on pages 32 through 36), you should store it to prevent your settings being lost when the DTX502 is turned off. 1. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed. CLK saVe to 01 :[User ] the Data Dial to select the click set (1 to 30) in 2. Turn which you wish to store your settings. 3. If necessary, name your new click set. Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and then turn the Data Dial to change it. NOTICE When you store new settings to a click set, its current settings will be overwritten. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the click set in question contains no irreplaceable settings. CLK saVe to 01 :[tser ] 4. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again. CLK saVe to 01 Are you sure? To cancel the process without storing any settings, press the [ ] button. 5. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to store your settings. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 37 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode Your DTX502 comes complete with eight different types of training that allow you to improve various drumming skills while having fun at the same time. You can work on your sense of rhythm, learn drum patterns from a wide range of different musical genres, and even practice playing as wildly as you can. Training Mode Improving your sense of rhythm 1. Groove Check ................................................................................................... page 38 2. Rhythm Gate .................................................................................................... page 40 3. Measure Break................................................................................................. page 41 4. Tempo Up/Down............................................................................................... page 42 5. Change Up ....................................................................................................... page 44 Learning drum patterns 6. Pad Gate .......................................................................................................... page 46 7. Part Mute .......................................................................................................... page 47 Playing as wildly as you can 8. Fast Blast ......................................................................................................... page 49 • If you wish to train along with a specific song, you should select that song in the Song area in advance (page 26). • To adjust the training tempo before starting, hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the Data Dial (page 31). NOTE The following cannot be used in Training Mode. • Pad Song • Pad Function 1. Groove Check As an aid to improving your timing, Groove Check displays on-screen how early or late you are drumming. Two different training styles are available—the first uses the metronome; the second lets you play along with a song. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed onscreen.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “01:Groove Check”. The [ ] and [ ] buttons will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. either the [ 3. Press ready to go. ] or [ ] button when you are If you press the [ ] button, the current song will be used for training. If you press the [ ] button, the metronome will be used. 38 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode the pads as tightly as you can along with the 4. Play metronome or song. NOTE You can adjust the training tempo by turning the Data Dial. Accurate timing Struck early Struck late ª ---EEnEE--- Timing of current strike Range of timing variation  Display of individual strikes • The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol. • When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center of the scale. • If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of the scale. • If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of the scale.  Range of timing variation • The range of variation in the timing of your drumming is shown by the band (E) at the bottom of the screen. • The wider the band, the larger the degree of variation in your drumming. end training, press the button used to start it in 5. To Step 3 above. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • If you press the [>] button while your score is displayed, you will be able to view your individual variation ranges for the hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cymbals. The wider the band (E) at the bottom of the screen, the larger the degree of variation in your drumming. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). NOTE • If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If looping (page 28) is turned off for the selected song, training will finish when the song plays once to the end. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 39 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 2. Rhythm Gate As an aid to improving your timing, Rhythm Gate displays on-screen any variation in the timing of your drumming. If you do not strike a pad in time with the metronome or song, it will not produce any sound. Two different training styles are available—the first uses the metronome; the second lets you play along with a song. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “02:Rhythm Gate”. The [ ] and [ ] buttons will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. either the [ 3. Press ready to go. ] or [ ] button when you are If you press the [ ] button, the current song will be used for training. If you press the [ ] button, the metronome will be used. the pads as tightly as you can along with the 4. Play metronome or song. NOTE You can adjust the training tempo by turning the Data Dial. A pad will only produce a sound if you strike it while the gate is open. The width of the gate represents the difficultly level. Accurate timing Struck early Struck late ª ---∆∆’∆∆--- Timing of current strike Gate width (i.e., difficulty level)  Display of individual strikes • The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol. • When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center of the scale. • If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of the scale. • If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of the scale. end training, press the button used to start it in 5. To Step 3 above. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • If you press the [>] button while your score is displayed, you will be able to view the individual percentages of accurately timed strikes for the hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cymbals. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). 40 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If looping (page 28) is turned off for the selected song, training will finish when the song plays once to the end. Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode  Adjusting the difficulty level With Rhythm Gate, you can reduce the width of the gate to make training more difficult and vice-versa. “02:Rhythm Gate” selected on the training 1. With menu page (TRNG1), press the [>] button. NOTE The difficulty level cannot be adjusted while training. The TRNG2 page will be displayed. tRNG1 02:Rhythm Gate ‚ tRNG2 Gate Width ” ---∆∆’∆∆--- 2. Turn the Data Dial to adjust the width of the gate. The wider the gate, the easier it is to produce a sound by striking the pads and viceversa. the [<] button to return to the training menu 3. Press page (TRNG1). 3. Measure Break With Measure Break training, the metronome will be muted for certain measures in a sequence. For example, by setting the measures during which you play fills to be muted in this way, you can check for any deviation in your timing when the metronome returns. This will help you to play at a constant tempo throughout your performances. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “03:MeasureBreak”. The [ ] button will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. tRNG1 03:MeasureBreak‚ 3. Press the [>] button to move to the TRNG2 page. tRNG2 ” Meas=3 Brk=1 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 41 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode the numbers of measures for which the metro4. Set nome is to be played and to be silenced. tRNG2 ” Meas=3 Brk=1 Measures for which the metronome is played Measures for which the metronome is not played • Using the [<]/[>] buttons, move the cursor to the parameter you wish to set. • Turn the data dial to set the corresponding number of measures between 1 and 8. 5. Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go. You can adjust the training tempo by turning the Data Dial. Measure:ƒ LLLK Measures for which the metronome is played 6. To end training, press the [ NOTE Measures for which the metronome is not played ] button once again. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). NOTE If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). 4. Tempo Up/Down Use Tempo Up/Down training to see how fast you can go and still maintain accurate timing. As you play along with a metronome, the drum module will automatically increase the tempo if your timing is good and decrease it if not. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “04:Tempo Up/Down”. The [ ] button will start flashing, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. tRNG1 04:tempo Up/Down 3. Press the [ 42 DTX502 Owner’s Manual ] button when you are ready to go. NOTE You can adjust the training tempo by turning the Data Dial. Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode on accurate timing, play the pads along 4. Focusing with the metronome. Accurate timing Gate width (i.e., difficulty level) Change in tempo ⁄=120 g2 --∆∆∆’∆∆O-Struck early Timing of current strike Struck late  Display of individual strikes • The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol. • When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center of the scale. • If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of the scale. • If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of the scale.  Criteria for increasing or decreasing the tempo The drum module evaluates your timing every four measures. The more accurate the timing of your drumming during those four measures, the more the tempo will be raised. If your timing was not accurate, however, the tempo will be lowered. Similarly, the more inaccurate, the more the tempo will drop. 5. To end training, press the [ ] button once again. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). NOTE • If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If you wish to adjust the difficulty level for this training, see the description of the Difficulty Level page from Menu Mode (page 72). • This training can be set either to mute pads when they are not played in time or to always play pads whenever they are struck. For details, see the description of the Ignore Timing page from Menu Mode (page 72). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 43 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 5. Change Up In Change Up training, your aim is to maintain good timing as you play along with up to seven different practice rhythms*. The practice rhythm will change automatically after a certain number of measures, which you can also set. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen. 3 *: The seven practice rhythm patterns are , , 3 , , 6 , , and .  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “05:Change Up”. The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. 3. Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go. Accurate timing Gate width (i.e., difficulty level) Rhythm to be played É --∆∆∆’∆∆O-- Ñ Struck early Timing of current strike Next rhythm Struck late  Display of individual strikes • The timing of your most recent strike is shown by the “t” symbol. • When your timing is accurate, the “t” symbol will be shown at the center of the scale. • If you strike the pad too early, the “t” symbol will be shown to the left of the scale. • If you strike the pad too late, the “t” symbol will be shown to the right of the scale. 44 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 4. Play the pads along with the practice rhythm. The practice rhythm will change in the following sequence. 3 3 6 • The rhythm to be played is shown at the center of the screen. • The next rhythm is shown flashing at the bottom-right of the screen. • To mute the practice rhythm and play along with only the metronome, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button. • To unmute the practice rhythm, again hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button. 5. To end training, press the [ NOTE ] button once again. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). • You can also press the [ to end training. ] button • If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If you wish to adjust the difficulty level for this training, see the description of the Difficulty Level page from Menu Mode (page 72). • This training can be set either to mute pads when they are not played in time or to always play pads whenever they are struck. For details, see the description of the Ignore Timing page from Menu Mode (page 72).  Selecting which practice rhythms to use Using the following procedure, you can select which of the seven practice rhythms you wish to use. “05:Change Up” selected on the training menu 1. With page (TRNG1), press the [>] button. NOTE Practice rhythms cannot be selected while training. The TRNG2 page will be displayed. tRNG1 05:Change Up tRNG2 ” É =on ‚ ‚ Turn the Data Dial to select whether to play (“on”) or 2. skip (“off”) the É rhythm. for the other six rhythms, use the [<]/[>] 3. Similarly buttons to navigate to the corresponding pages, and turn the Data Dial to select whether to play or skip them. Page Rhythm TRNG2 TRNG3 TRNG4 TRNG5 3 Page (É) TRNG6 (Ñ) TRNG7 ( ÑA) TRNG8 Rhythm 3 ( èA) (ê) 6 ( êB) (è) DTX502 Owner’s Manual 45 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode  Changing the number of measures after which the rhythm changes “05:Change Up” selected on the training menu 1. With page (TRNG1), use the [>] button to navigate to the TRNG9 page. tRNG9 ” Measure=2 the Data Dial to select 1, 2, or 4 as the number 2. Turn of measures after which the rhythm changes. 6. Pad Gate In Pad Gate training, the pads will only produce a sound when your drumming precisely matches a practice drum pattern. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen. In addition, you will be able to view the individual hit ratios for each of the drum parts.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “06:Pad Gate”. The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. 3. Press the [ ] button when you are ready to go. The currently selected song will start to play. 4. Play the song’s drum pattern on the pads. • The pads will not produce a sound if they are struck out of time. • In addition, the pads will only produce a sound when you play the same drum pattern as in the song. the [<]/[>] buttons to view the individual hit 5. Use ratios for the hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cymbals—that is, the percentage of times they were played in time and matching the drum pattern in the song. Hit ratio 0% ¢¢¢¢¢ HiHat HSKtC Hi-hat Cymbals Snare Currently selected drum part 46 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Toms Kick NOTE The above setting cannot be adjusted while training. Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 6. To end training, press the [ ] button. • Your score will be displayed on-screen. The highest possible score is 100 points. • You can also view your hit ratios for individual drum parts after training has ended. Use the [<]/[>] buttons to navigate to them from the page displaying the score. • Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). NOTE • If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Timer page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If you wish to adjust the difficulty level for this training, see the description of the Difficulty Level page from Menu Mode (page 72). • This training can be set either to mute pads when they are not played in time or to always play pads whenever they are struck. For details, see the description of the Ignore Timing page from Menu Mode (page 72). • You can set which groups of pads the drum module should consider when deciding whether or not you are playing the same drum pattern as in the song. For details, see the description of the Pad Gate Group page from Menu Mode (page 72). • If looping (page 28) is turned off for the selected song, training will finish when the song plays once to the end. 7. Part Mute Part Mute training lets you mute any or all of the drum parts (i.e., hi-hat, snare, kick, toms, and cymbals) and also the instrument parts from an accompanying song. You can mute the parts in two different ways—either on-screen or by striking the pad in question. The latter is referred to as auto-play muting. Note that this type of training is not scored.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “07:Part Mute”. The [ ] button will flash, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. the [ 3. Press selected song. ] button to start the currently HiHat HSKtC BO Hi-hat Snare Cymbals Toms Kick Drum parts Other (i.e., accompaniment parts other than bass) Bass Accompaniment (non-drum) parts The letters displayed on-screen correspond to the following parts. H: Hi-hat S: Snare K: Kick T: Toms C: Cymbals B: Bass O: Other (i.e., accompaniment parts other than bass) DTX502 Owner’s Manual 47 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 4. Select the parts to be muted.  Muting on-screen 4-1. Using the [<]/[>] buttons, move the cursor to the part you wish to mute (H, S, K, T, C, B, or O). 4-2. Turn the data dial to mute (or unmute) the selected part. The symbol “ M ” will be displayed above any muted part. M HiHat HSKtC BO  Muting with the pads 4-1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ auto-play muting. NOTE ] button to turn on Auto-play muting cannot be used with parts muted on-screen. aAuto Mute=on b cÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇd 4-2. Strike the pad corresponding to the drum part you wish to mute. The part will be muted and the symbol “ N ” will be displayed above the corresponding letter. N HiHat HSKtC BO To turn off auto-play muting, again hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [ ] button. 5. Practice playing the pads along with the song. 6. To end training, press the [ ] button. 48 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE Auto-play muting of a drum part will be automatically turned off if a pad corresponding to that part is not struck for certain period of time. NOTE If looping (page 28) is turned off for the selected song, training will finish when the song plays once to the end. Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode 8. Fast Blast In a Fast Blast training session, you simply play the drums as wildly as you can over a set period of time. More a game than a form of practice, your aim is to get the highest possible score. When you have finished training, your score will be displayed on-screen.  Training procedure down the [SHIFT] button and press the [KIT] 1. Hold button to access Training Mode. 2. Turn the Data Dial to select “08:Fast Blast”. 3. Press the [ ] button. The following will be shown on-screen, indicating that the drum module is on standby to start training. HIt PADS! 0 p 10 NOTE If you wish to adjust the duration of training, see the description of the Fast Blast Timer page from Menu Mode (page 73). Time limit (i.e., the duration of training) 4. Strike a pad when you are ready to go. Play as many of the pads as often as you can before the time limit. 5.5 18467 p Score Remaining time • The timer will start when you strike the first pad. • Your current score and remaining time will be displayed on-screen. • To end a training session before the time limit, press the [ ] button once again. the time limit is reached, the message “Fin5. When ished!” will be displayed on-screen together with your final score. Finished! 63726 p º ‚ DTX502 Owner’s Manual 49 Basic Techniques Practicing in Training Mode  Viewing your power and activity points 5-1. 5-2. With the message “Finished!” displayed on-screen, press the [>] button. The drum module will display your power points (Pwr) and activity points (Act). Power points ” Pwr: 32507 p Act: 31219 p‚ Activity points • The more powerfully you played the pads, the higher your power points will be. • The more pads you played, the higher your activity points will be. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1).  Viewing your high score 5-1. With the message “Finished!” displayed on-screen, press the [>] button twice. 5-2. The best score you have recorded so far will be displayed. ” BESt SCORE 63726 p Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to return to the training menu page (TRNG1). 50 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Basic Techniques Recording Your Performances You can record your performances in the DTX502 in the form of User songs. NOTE • Performances recorded in the drum module are not saved as audio files. Instead, they are saved in the form of MIDI data, which describes which pads were played and when. • The following cannot be used while recording. • Pad Song • Pad Function Getting Ready 1. Press the [SONG] button. the Data Dial to select the User song (61 to 100) 2. Turn you wish to record into. If you wish to record your performance while playing along with a Preset song (1 to 60), you should instead select that song. In such a case, your performance will be recorded into the lowest numbered User song containing no data. down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SONG] 3. Hold button to open the REC page. Hold NOTICE You can record into a User song that already contains data; however, that data will be overwritten with your new performance. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the User song in question contains no irreplaceable data. NOTE If no space is available for recording in User songs, the message “Seq data is not empty.” will be displayed. REC ⁄=120 Quantize=off 4/4 the cursor to the item you want to change using 4. Move the [<]/[>] buttons, and then turn the Data Dial to change its value. REC ⁄=120 Quantize=off 4/4 REC ⁄=120 Quantize=Ö 4/4 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 51 Basic Techniques Recording Your Performances  Tempo You can set the song tempo at which you wish to record your performance.  Quantize NOTE Quantization is a function that corrects any small deviations in the timing of your performance. The DTX502 can make recordings quantized based on a specified note length. The available quantization settings are as follows. When quantization is set to “off”, deviations in the timing of your drumming will not be corrected. • When 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8, or 15/8 is set as the time signature: á, ⁄, Ö, ÖA, Ü, ÜA, or off • When a time signature other than the above is set: ⁄, ⁄A, Ö, ÖA, Ü, ÜA, or off Example of how quantizing works • These recorded notes were not played exactly in time. • However, quantization can correct these small deviations in timing as follows. Exactly on the beat  Time signature You can also set the time signature for the metronome when recording. Recording 1. Press the [ ] button. NOTE If you would like to hear the metronome as you record, be sure to turn it on before you start recording. You will be counted in and recording will then start. REC Meas=001:01 Now recording... 2. To stop recording, press the [ ] button once again. Playing Back a Performance 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. To stop playback, press the [ 52 DTX502 Owner’s Manual ] button once again. NOTE You cannot record audio input via the [AUX IN] jack. Basic Techniques Recording Your Performances Naming a User Song Using the following procedure, you can freely assign a name to the User song you have recorded. 1. NOTE • Preset songs cannot be renamed. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the SONG1 page. • Songs containing no data (i.e., “EmptySng”) cannot be renamed. The button will start to flash and the following page will be displayed. SONG saVe name :[Untitled] 2. Change the displayed name as required. Press the [<]/[>] buttons to move the cursor to the character you wish to change, and then turn the Data Dial to change it. SONG saVe name :[tntitled] 3. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again. SONG saVe name Are you sure? To cancel the process without changing the song name, press the [ ] button. the [SAVE/ENTER] button to save the new song 4. Press name. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 53 Basic Techniques Recording Your Performances SONG4 Deleting a Recorded Performance 1. Press the [SONG] button. The SONG1 page will be displayed. 2. Turn the data dial to select the song you wish to delete. 3. Navigate to the SONG4 page using the [<]/[>] buttons. SONG4 Clear ” Current Song 4. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. SONG4 Clear Are you sure? To cancel the process without deleting the song, press the [ ] button. the [SAVE/ENTER] button to delete the selected 5. Press song. 54 DTX502 Owner’s Manual NOTE Preset songs cannot be deleted. Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Advanced Techniques Menu Mode is used to customize drum-module parameters and functions, which are organized into the following eight areas. Menu Mode 01: Mixer Area: Mixer settings MIXER Mixer settings........................................... Page 57 02: KitVoice Area: Settings affecting individual voices KitV1 KitV2 KitV3 KitV4 KitV5 KitV6 KitV7 KitV8 KitV9 KitV10 KitV11 KitV12 KitV13 Layers ...................................................... Page 57 Voices ...................................................... Page 58 Volume..................................................... Page 59 Tuning ...................................................... Page 59 Stereo Panning ........................................ Page 59 Decay....................................................... Page 59 Cutoff Frequency...................................... Page 59 MIDI Note Number................................... Page 60 MIDI Channel........................................... Page 60 MIDI Gate Time ....................................... Page 60 Reverb Send (Source) ............................. Page 60 Hold Mode ............................................... Page 61 Alternate Group ....................................... Page 61 03: KitCommon Area: Settings affecting entire kits KitC1 KitC2 KitC3 KitC4 KitC5 KitC6 KitC7 KitC8 KitC9 KitC10 07: Training Area: Training-related settings Trng1 Trng2 Trng3 Trng4 Trng5 Timer......................................................... Page 72 Difficulty Level ........................................... Page 72 Ignore Timing ............................................ Page 72 Pad Gate Group ........................................ Page 72 Fast Blast Timer ........................................ Page 73 08: System Area: System settings System1 System2 System3 System4 System5 System6 System7 System8 System9 System10 Kit Lock............................................... Page 73 Muted Volume..................................... Page 73 Master Equalizer..................................Page 74 Master Tuning ......................................Page 74 Local Control .......................................Page 74 Metronome Output...............................Page 74 Number Display Function ....................Page 74 Auto Power-Off.................................... Page 75 Restore ............................................... Page 75 Factory Set ......................................... Page 75 Double Bass Switch ................................. Page 61 Reverb Send (Voices) .............................. Page 61 Reverb Type............................................. Page 62 Reverb Return ......................................... Page 62 Pad Control .............................................. Page 62 Snare Adjustment .................................... Page 62 Tempo...................................................... Page 62 Trigger Setup Link.................................... Page 63 MIDI Program Change ............................. Page 63 MIDI Control Change ............................... Page 63 04: KitJob Area: Kit management KitJ1 KitJ2 Copy Pad ................................................. Page 64 Clear User Kit .......................................... Page 65 05: Pad Area: Pad-related settings Pad1 Pad2 Pad3 Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity.......................... Page 65 Foot Close Position.................................. Page 65 Pad Function............................................ Page 66 06: Trigger Area: Trigger-related settings TRG1 TRG2 TRG3 TRG4 TRG5 TRG6 TRG7 TRG8 TRG9 TRG10 TRG11 TRG12 Trigger Setup ........................................... Page 66 Velocity Curve.......................................... Page 67 Pad Type.................................................. Page 68 Gain ......................................................... Page 68 Minimum Level......................................... Page 68 Minimum Velocity..................................... Page 69 Reject Time.............................................. Page 69 Wait Time................................................. Page 69 Noise Filter............................................... Page 69 Crosstalk.................................................. Page 70 Crosstalk Pads......................................... Page 70 Copy Trigger ............................................ Page 71 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 55 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Setting Procedure  Storing your settings Use the following procedure in Menu Mode to select parameters and change their settings. 1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/ ENTER] button to access Menu Mode. If you change a parameter setting in the KitVoice area, the KitCommon area, the KitJob area, or on one of pages TRG2 to TRG12 from the Trigger area, you will need to store the new setting in the drum module’s internal memory as described below. NOTE If you switch to another kit or trigger setup or turn off the drum module without storing your new settings, the parameters in question will revert to their previously stored settings. Hold MENU 01:Mixer 2.  Procedure ‚ Turn the Data Dial to select the area containing the parameter you wish to set. As an example, the following describes how to store modified trigger settings. Note that trigger settings are stored as part of a User trigger setup. Meanwhile, settings from the KitVoice, KitCommon, and KitJob areas are stored as part of one of the User kits, which are numbered 51 to 100 (page 25). 1. MENU 02:KitVoice 3. ‚ tRG saVe to 15 :[DtX522K ] Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select the parameter. 2. >KitV1 snareHd ”Layer=stack ‚ NOTE When a number of parameters are contained in a single page, you can move the cursor between them using the [<]/[>] buttons. 4. After changing trigger parameter settings, press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. The page for storing trigger setup data will be displayed. Turn the Data Dial to select the User trigger setup (15 to 30) in which you wish to store your settings. tRG saVe to 16 :[DtX522K ] 3. To rename the trigger setup, move the cursor using the [<]/[>] buttons and turn the Data Dial to change the selected character. 4. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to store your settings. Turn the Data Dial to change the parameter’s setting. >KitV1* snareHd ”Layer=XFade1 ‚ tRG saVe to 16 Are you sure? NOTICE Whenever you change a parameter setting in the KitVoice area, the KitCommon area, the KitJob area, or on one of pages TRG2 to TRG12 from the Trigger area, an asterisk will be displayed after the page name (i.e., “TRG2*”). This is to remind you that parameters have been changed but not yet stored. To store your settings, follow the procedure described in the column on the right. The asterisk will disappear when you store your settings. Parameter values from pages where an asterisk is not displayed are stored automatically. 56 DTX502 Owner’s Manual CAUTION When you store trigger setup data, all of the data in the selected trigger setup will be overwritten with your new settings. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the trigger setup in question contains no irreplaceable settings. 5. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to store your settings. To cancel the process without storing any settings, press the [ ] button. 6. When your settings have been successfully stored, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode 01: Mixer Area 02: KitVoice Area Mixer settings Settings affecting individual voices The Mixer area is used to adjust the volumes of the various drum kit voices. MIXER Mixer settings >MIXER ÏÏÏÏÏÈ ” Kick=16 HSKtCR KitV1 Layers q q Volume Use the volume parameters to balance the input group* volumes.  Input group indicators H: Hi-hat sound volumes S: Snare sound volumes K: Kick sound volumes T: Tom sound volumes C: Cymbal sound volumes R: Degree to which reverb is applied Use the [<]/[>] buttons to select an input group, and then turn the Data Dial to adjust its volume. Faders are displayed above each of the input-group indicators to give a general idea of the current volume balance. The reverb (R) setting applies to all of the drum kit’s voices. NOTE *: Input groups Voices are organized into input groups based on their voice category. For example, when you change the T setting (tom sound volumes), the volume of all sounds from the Tom (T) voice category will change accordingly. Settings The KitVoice area is used to set drum voices for individual trigger input sources. >KitV1 snareHd ”Layer=stack ‚ q w q Trigger input source This item indicates the trigger input source currently selected for editing. Trigger input sources can be selected by striking the corresponding pad or zone. This selection applies to both Layer A and Layer B. (Trigger input sources are not displayed individually for each layer.) NOTE You can also select trigger input sources by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. Settings snareHd, snareOp, snareCl, snrOfHd, snrOfOp, snrOfCl, tom1Hd, tom2Hd, tom3Hd, rideBw, rideEg, rideCp, crashBw, crashEg, crashCp, kick, pad8, hhOpBw, hhOpEg, hhOpCp, hhClBw, hhClEg, hhClCp, hhFtCl, hhSplsh, pad10, pad11, pad12, and kick2 For details on the correspondence between trigger input jacks and trigger input sources, refer to page 29. 0 to 16 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 57 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode w Layer Use this parameter to specify how the voices are to be arranged in the two layers (A and B) for the specified trigger input source. Settings Description off Layer B is turned off and only the voice from Layer A produces a sound. stack The voices from Layer A and Layer B produce sounds at the same velocity over the entire velocity range. Using the settings “XFade1” to “XFade9”, you can crossfade the velocities of Layer A and Layer B in various different ways as shown below. Voices KitV2 >KitV2 snareHd˙ ”S01:MapleCustm‚ w e q Trigger input source This item indicates the trigger input source currently selected for editing. Trigger input sources can be selected by striking the corresponding pad or zone. To switch between Layer A and Layer B, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [<] or [>] button accordingly. NOTE XFade1 You can also select trigger input sources by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. XFade2 XFade3 Settings snareHd, snareOp, snareCl, snrOfHd, snrOfOp, snrOfCl, tom1Hd, tom2Hd, tom3Hd, rideBw, rideEg, rideCp, crashBw, crashEg, crashCp, kick, pad8, hhOpBw, hhOpEg, hhOpCp, hhClBw, hhClEg, hhClCp, hhFtCl, hhSplsh, pad10, pad11, pad12, and kick2 For details on the correspondence between trigger input jacks and trigger input sources, refer to page 29. XFade4 w Voice category Use this parameter to set the category from which a voice will be assigned to the selected layer. XFade5 XFade6 XFade7 XFade8 XFade9 VelSw*** q The two voices are layered at the velocity indicated in the setting value. For example, with a setting of “VelSw60”, the voice from Layer A would produce a sound at velocities from 1 to 59, and the voice from Layer B would produce a sound at velocities from 60 to 127. Settings Description K S T C H P E W e Kick Snare Tom Cymbal Hi-hat Percussion Effect Wave Voice (*1) Pad Song (*2) NOTE *1: Wave voices A wave voice is an audio file containing, for example, an instrument sound, an effect sound, or a sampled phrase. These .WAV format files can be transferred from a computer to your drum module and used as voices for pads. See page 79 for instructions on how to transfer them to the drum module. *2: Pad Song Using the Pad Song function, you can play one of the drum module’s internal songs simply by striking a pad. In the same way as regular voices, these songs can be assigned to individual pad layers. The Pad Song function can play up to three songs simultaneously. In addition, when you have selected Pad Song as the voice category, you can also set the song’s Repeat and Play modes as shown below (page 30). >KitV2* snareHd˙ ”Ö39:Funk C ≥‚ Repeat mode 58 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Play mode Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode e Voice Number: Voice Name Use the Voice Number parameter to choose a voice from the selected category. Settings When “00:NoAssign” is selected as the voice, the layer in question will not produce any sound. >KitV3 snareHd˙ ” Volume=127 ‚ w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. Settings q w KitV6 q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w Volume Use this parameter to set the volume of the voice assigned to the selected layer. KitV4 q w Pan Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the voice assigned to the selected layer. Volume Settings Stereo Panning >KitV5 snareHd˙ ” Pan= C ‚ The number of available voices varies depending on the selected category. For details on the voices in each, refer to the Voice List (page 85). NOTE KitV3 KitV5 0 to 127 Tuning >KitV4 snareHd˙ ” tune=+ 0.0 ‚ q L64 to C to R63 Decay >KitV6 snareHd˙ ” Decay=+ 0 ‚ q w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w Decay The amount of time it takes a voice to fade away to silence is referred to as its “decay”. Use this parameter to set the decay for the voice assigned to the selected layer. Positive values produce shorter decay times and crisper sounds. Settings –64 to 0 to +63 w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w Tune Use this parameter to set the tuning of the voice assigned to the selected layer. Settings –24.0 to +24.0 (in 10-cent steps) NOTE This setting has no effect when Pad Song ( e ) is selected as the voice category. KitV7 Cutoff Frequency >KitV7 snareHd˙ ”CutOffFreq=+ 0‚ q w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w CutOffFreq Use this parameter to set the filter cutoff frequency for the voice assigned to the selected layer. Negative values produce darker sounds and vice-versa. Settings –64 to 0 to +63 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 59 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode KitV8 MIDI Note Number >KitV8 ”Note= KitV10 snareHd˙ 38/D 1 ‚ q MIDI Gate Time >KitV10 snareHd˙ ”Gatetime=0.3s ‚ w q w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w Note Use this parameter to set the MIDI note number that is output whenever a trigger signal is received from the selected trigger input source. Settings can be made individually for Layer A and Layer B, meaning that two MIDI notes with different note numbers can be output simultaneously in response to a single trigger signal. Settings are displayed as “Note number / Note name”. w GateTime The time that passes between the output of a MIDI Note On message and the corresponding Note Off message is referred to as the “gate time”. Use this parameter to set the gate time for notes output whenever a trigger signal is received from the selected trigger input source. Settings can be made individually for Layer A and Layer B. Settings NOTE Layer B will not produce any MIDI notes when the Layer parameter from the KitV1 page is set to “off”. KitV9 Settings 0.0s to 9.9s 0/C-2 to 127/G 8 KitV11 Reverb Send (Source) >KitV11 snareHd ” ReVSend= 40 ‚ MIDI Channel q w >KitV9 snareHd˙ ” MIDI Ch=10 ‚ q w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV2 page. w MIDI Ch Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which notes are output whenever a trigger signal is received from the selected trigger input source. Settings can be made individually for Layer A and Layer B. Settings 1 to 16 60 DTX502 Owner’s Manual q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1 page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A and Layer B. w RevSend Use this parameter to specify how much reverb is to be applied to voices produced by the specified trigger input source. Settings 0 to 127 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Hold Mode KitV12 03: KitCommon Area >KitV12 snareHd ” HoldMode=off ‚ q Settings affecting entire kits The KitCommon area is used to set parameters that apply to the current kit. w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1 page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A and Layer B. w HoldMode Use this parameter to turn Hold mode on or off for voices produced by the specified trigger input source. Settings Description on MIDI Note On and Note Off messages are output alternately whenever the pad is struck. Note that when Wave Voice (W) has been specified as the voice category, the Wave Voice will be played repeatedly. off This setting corresponds to normal operation: A MIDI Note On message is output when the pad is struck, and the corresponding MIDI Note Off message is output automatically after the gate time has elapsed. KitC1 Double Bass Switch >KitC1 ” DblBass=off ‚ q q DblBass By setting this parameter to “on”, you can easily configure your drum module to produce a kick drum sound whenever you operate the pedal connected to the [HI-HAT CONTROL] trigger input jack. This convenient function provides support for double bass drumming techniques. Settings off or on NOTE Opening and closing of the hi-hat is not possible when DblBass is set to “on”. Alternate Group KitV13 KitC2 >KitV13 snareHd ” AltGrp=off Reverb Send (Voices) q >KitC2 ” ReVSendDr= 60‚ w q Trigger input source See q Trigger input source from the description of the KitV1 page. The setting made on this page applies to both Layer A and Layer B. w AltGrp Use this parameter to assign the voices produced by the specified trigger input source to an alternate group—that is, a collection of voices that you do not want to play simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats. If a voice is triggered while another from the same alternate group is already playing, the earlier voice will be silenced before the new one is played. Settings Description off Voice is not assigned to an alternate group HHOpen Open Hi-hat group HHClose Closed Hi-hat group 1 to 9 Numbered alternate groups: Voices that you do not want to play simultaneously can be freely assigned to them. q q RevSendDr Use this parameter to specify the level at which all of the current kit’s drum voices are to be sent to the built-in reverb unit. Settings 0 to 127 NOTE The RevSendDr parameter affects all of the current kit’s drum voices. To adjust the reverb level for individual pads or trigger input sources, use the Reverb Send (Source) parameter (RevSend) from the KitVoice area (page 60). NOTE The Open Hi-hat group and the Closed Hi-hat group operate according to the following rules. • When a voice from the Open Hi-hat group is triggered, other voices from that group and those from the Closed Hi-hat group are not silenced. • When a voice from the Closed Hi-hat group is triggered, all voices from the Open Hi-Hat group are silenced. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 61 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode KitC3 Reverb Type Pad Control KitC5 >KitC3 ”ReVtype=hall1 ‚ >KitC5 ”PacCtl=snares ‚ q q q RevType Use this parameter to select the type of reverb to be applied. Settings KitC4 none, hall1, hall2, hall3, room1, room2, room3, stage1, stage2, plate q PadCtl When a pad unit equipped with a pad controller is connected to the [qSNARE] jack, this parameter can be used to select a function for the controller. Reverb Return >KitC4 ”ReVMastRet= 64‚ Settings Description off Pad controller performs no function. snares Adjustment of snare-wire tension (also affecting open-rim sounds) tuning Adjustment of tuning (also affecting open-rim sounds) tempo Adjustment of the tempo q q RevMastRet Use this parameter to set the reverb unit’s return level. Settings Snare Adjustment KitC6 >KitC6 ” Snares= 4 0 to 127 ‚ NOTE q The reverb return level can be adjusted to balance the volumes of the sounds with reverb applied and those without. q Snares Use this parameter to adjust the snare-wire tension for the pad connected to the [qSNARE] jack. An “off” setting simulates the snare wires being fully removed from the head. KitC7 Settings Description off Snare wires fully removed 1 to 24 Higher values correspond to tighter snare wires and vice-versa. Tempo >KitC7 ” tempo=off ‚ q q Tempo Use this parameter to specify the tempo to be set automatically upon selection of the current drum kit. When set to “off”, the tempo will not change automatically when the current kit is selected. Settings 62 DTX502 Owner’s Manual off, 30 to 300 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode KitC8 Trigger Setup Link KitC10 q >KitC8 ”trgSetupLk=off‚ Settings KitC9 off, 01 to 30 e q On the MIDI Control Change page, you can set values for MIDI Control Change volume and pan messages to be sent when the current kit is selected. By sending these MIDI Control Change messages, you can have the MIDI instrument connected via the MIDI OUT connector automatically set its volume and stereo panning when you select the current kit. w >KitC9 Ch1=off ”PC001 M000L000‚ q MIDI channel (Ch) Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which to send the Control Change messages. Settings r r NOTE MIDI Program Change e w >KitC10 Ch1=off ”Vol=100 Pan= C q q TrgSetupLk Use this parameter to assign a trigger setup to the currently selected kit. Select “off” if the kit does not need a specific trigger setup. MIDI Control Change 1 to 16 t On the MIDI Program Change page, you can specify the MIDI Program Change number to be sent when the current kit is selected, in addition to the corresponding Bank Select MSB and LSB messages. w Control Change output switch Use this parameter to turn the output of Control Change messages on or off. Settings off or on NOTE By sending MIDI Program Change messages, you can have the MIDI instrument automatically change its voice when you select the current kit. q MIDI channel (Ch) Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel on which to send the Program Change messages. Settings 1 to 16 w Program-change output switch Use this parameter to turn the output of Program Change messages on or off. Settings e Volume Use this parameter to set a value for the Control Change volume message. Settings 0 to 127 r Pan Use this parameter to set a value for the Control Change pan message. Settings L64 to C to R63 off or on e Program change number Use this parameter to set the Program Change number to be sent. Settings 001 to 128 r Bank Select MSB t Bank Select LSB Settings 000 to 127 NOTE In order to set the Bank Select MSB and LSB parameters correctly, you will need to refer to the MIDI instrument’s Voice List and MIDI Data Format. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 63 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode 3. 04: KitJob Area Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to copy the pad. Kit management KitJ1 Copy Pad >KitJ1 CopyPad Are you sure? >KitJ1 CopyPad ”01:Snare≥Snare‚ CAUTION Whenever a pad is copied, all of the destination pad’s settings will be overwritten with those of the copied pad. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the destination pad contains no irreplaceable settings. On the Copy Pad page, you can copy all settings for a specific pad into the current kit from another. NOTICE When you copy a pad using the procedure described below, the current kit’s settings will be modified but not saved (i.e., the asterisk (*) will be displayed). To make the change permanent, be sure to save your settings (page 25). If you select another kit or turn off the drum module without doing so, the kit will revert to its original settings. 1. 4. Navigate to the Copy Pad page and set both the kit to copy from and the pad to be copied. >KitJ1 CopyPad ”02:Snare≥Snare‚ Number of kit to copy from: Pad to be copied NOTE When the pad name is flashing, you can also select a different one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to copy the pad. To cancel the process without copying any data, press the [ ] button. Move the cursor and set the destination pad (from the current kit). >KitJ1 CopyPad ”02:tom1≥tom2 ‚ Destination pad NOTE When the destination pad is flashing, you can also select a different one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. 64 DTX502 Owner’s Manual When the pad has been successfully copied, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode KitJ2 Clear User Kit >KitJ2 Clear ”51:User Kit 05: Pad Area Pad-related settings Pad1 On the Clear User Kit page, you can restore a User kit to its default settings. 1. >Pad1 ” Splash= 30 Navigate to the Clear User Kit page and specify which of the User kits (numbered 51 to 100) is to be cleared. >KitJ2 Clear ”51:User Kit User kit number 2. Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to clear the User kit. ‚ q q Splash Use this parameter to set the degree of sensitivity for detecting hi-hat foot splashes. The higher the value, the easier it will be to produce a foot-splash sound with the hi-hat controller. High values may, however, result in splash sounds being unintentionally produced when, for example, you operate the hi-hat controller lightly as you keep time. It is a good idea to set this parameter to “off” if you do not want to play foot splashes. Settings >KitJ2 Clear Are you sure? Pad2 off, 1 to 127 Foot Close Position CAUTION When a User kit is cleared, all of its settings will be returned to their default conditions. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the User kit in question contains no irreplaceable settings. >Pad2 ” ClosePos=28 ‚ q Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to clear the User kit. To cancel the process without clearing any settings, press the [ ] button. 3. When the User kit has been successfully cleared, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. q ClosePos Use this parameter to adjust the position at which the hi-hat switches from open to closed when the hi-hat controller is depressed. The lower the value, the smaller the virtual opening between the top and bottom hi-hats. Settings 0 to 32 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 65 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Pad Function Pad3 >Pad3 snareHd ”Func=off 06: Trigger Area q Trigger-related settings TRG1 Trigger Setup w >tRG1 ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ 01:DtX522K ‚ q Trigger input This item indicates the trigger input source to which a function is to be assigned. Trigger input sources can be selected by striking the corresponding pad or zone. NOTE You can also select trigger input sources by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. w Func Pad Function allows control panel operations and the like to be performed by striking the specified pad or zone. Use this parameter to select the function to be performed. Settings Description off Voices will be played in the normal way. inc kitNo Increase the kit number by 1 dec kitNo Decrease the kit number by 1 inc songNo Increase the song number by 1 dec songNo Decrease the song number by 1 inc clkNo Increase the Click Set by 1 dec clkNo Decrease the Click Set by 1 inc tempo Increase the tempo by 1 BPM dec tempo Decrease the tempo by 1 BPM tap tempo Tap a new tempo (page 36) clkOn/Off Turn the metronome on or off song> Start or stop an external song clk&song> Turn the metronome on or off and simultaneously start or stop an external song (synchronized with the metronome) doubleBass Turn the Double Bass Switch on or off (page 61) NOTE Pad Function cannot be used when in Training Mode. 66 DTX502 Owner’s Manual q q Trigger setup Use this parameter to select a trigger setup. Settings 01: DTX522K, 02: DTX532K, 03: DTX542K, 04: DTX562K, 05: DTX500K, 06: DTX520K, 07: DTX530K, 08: DTX540K, 09: DTX550K, 10: DTX560K, 11: DTXP4STD (DTXPRESS IV STD SET), 12: DTXP4SP (DTXPRESS IV SP SET), 13: DTXPL (DTXPLORER), 14: DrumTrig, and 15–30: UserTrig NOTE The most appropriate trigger setup for your electronic drum kit will be automatically selected during the Initial Setup process (page 13). For this reason, it is usually not necessary to change the setting on this page. However, you may decide to edit trigger parameters after making detailed changes to the settings of individual pads in order, for example, to add another pad or to eliminate crosstalk. In such a case, you should store your settings in a User trigger setup (numbered 15 to 30) as described below. Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Velocity Curve Spl11 Spl12 q >tRG2 Snare 00% ”VelCurVe=norm ‚ Velocity TRG2 Spl13 Spl14 Spl15 w q Trigger input This item indicates the pad to be edited. If necessary, strike a different pad to select it. Trigger input level NOTE • The percentage value at the top-right of the screen indicates the trigger input level when the pad is struck. Snare, Tom1, Tom2, Tom3, Ride, Crash, Kick, Pad8, Hihat, Pad10, Pad11, and Pad12 Settings Spl21 Velocity • You can also select a pad by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. Spl22 Spl23 Spl24 w VelCurve Use this parameter to select a velocity curve for the selected pad. A velocity curve determines how the velocity (or power) of the sound is affected by how hard you strike the pad. loud2, loud1, norm, hard1, hard2, Fix1 to Fix5, Spl11 to Spl15, Spl21 to Spl25, and ofs1 to ofs5 Trigger input level Velocity lo ud 1 lo ud 2 Settings Velocity Spl25 ofs1 ofs2 3 no rm ofs 4 ha rd 2 ha rd 1 ofs Velocity Trigger input level s5 of Trigger input level Fix1 Fix2 Fix3 Fix4 Fix5 Trigger input level DTX502 Owner’s Manual 67 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode TRG3 Pad Type TRG4 Gain q q >tRG3 Snare 00% ”SN:XP80 ‚ >tRG4 Snare 00% ” Gain= 1 ‚ w w q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w Pad Type Use this parameter to specify a type for the selected pad. w Gain Use this parameter to set the level of gain (or amplification) applied to trigger input signals from the selected pad. The higher the gain setting, the louder the sounds produced by light drumming. Settings –– OFF KK KP125W/125, KP65, or KU100 SN XP120/100, XP80, XP70, TP120SD/100, TP70S/70, or TP65S/65 TM XP120/100, XP80, XP70, TP120SD/100, TP70S/70, or TP65S/65 CY PCY155, PCY150S, PCY135, PCY130SC, PCY130S/130, PCY100, PCY90, or PCY65S/65 HH RHH135, RHH130, PCY100, PCY90, or TP65S/65 DT DT10/20SN (for snare drums), DT10/20tomH (for high toms), DT10/20tomL (for low toms), DT10/ 20kick (for kick drums), or misc1 to misc4 (for nonYamaha pads) For dual piezo pads *: Only selectable when the input source q is Tom1, Tom2, or Kick. 2P *: Balance settings can be made for the two piezos (H49 to H1, 0, or R1 to R49). If, for example, a dual piezo pad was connected to the [wTOM1/ !0] jack, Tom 1 would be the head (H) and Pad 10 would be the rim (R). If the head sounds when the rim is struck, move the balance further to the R side to ensure that the rim sounds instead. Similarly, if the rim sounds when the head is struck, move the balance further to the H side. >tRG3 tom1 0% ”2P:Balance=R 6‚ 68 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Settings TRG5 1 to 127 Minimum Level q >tRG5 Snare 00% ” MinLeVel= 1% ‚ w q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w MinLevel Use this parameter to set the minimum level of trigger signal that must be received at the selected pad in order for a sound to be produced. Settings 0 to 99 (%) Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode TRG6 Minimum Velocity TRG8 Wait Time q q >tRG6 Snare 00% ” MinVel= 1 ‚ >tRG8 Snare 00% ”Waittime= 4ms ‚ w w q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w MinVel Use this parameter to specify the velocity (or volume) of sounds produced by trigger signals at the minimum level set on the Minimum Level page (TRG5). w WaitTime Use this parameter to specify how long the selected pad will wait before detecting a trigger signal. By adjusting this time to ensure that trigger signals are detected at their peak levels, you can ensure that the volume of sounds produced accurately reflects the strength of playing. Settings 0 to 126 Settings TRG7 1 to 64 (ms) Reject Time q TRG9 Noise Filter q >tRG7 Snare 00% ”Rejtime= 5ms ‚ >tRG9 Snare 00% ”NoiseFilter= 5‚ w w q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w RejTime Trigger inputs can be set to accept only the first of a number of trigger signals arriving very close together. Use this parameter to set the reject time for the selected pad—that is, how long it will wait after accepting one trigger signal before accepting another. In this way, you can prevent a rebounding stick or beater from producing more than one sound (i.e., double triggering). Settings 4 to 500 (ms) q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w NoiseFilter Any noise contained in trigger signals can cause sounds to be produced unintentionally. Use this parameter to filter out such noise. Larger values correspond to a higher level of filtering. Settings 1 to 10 NOTE Larger noise filter settings can, in cases where the pad is struck multiple times in rapid succession, result in sounds being dropped. Be sure to adjust the setting to best match your style of drumming. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 69 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode TRG10 Crosstalk Tip q >tRG10 Snare 00% ” Crosstalk=35 ‚ The following example shows how crosstalk could be eliminated if snare sounds were unintentionally produced when toms 1 and 2 were played. w 1. q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. w Crosstalk The term “crosstalk” refers to the output of spurious trigger signals from a pad other than the one that was struck as a result of vibration or interference between pads. Use this parameter to specify a level for preventing crosstalk from the pads set on the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11). If the level of the trigger signal from the pad indicated by q is lower than this level whenever one of those pads is struck, it will be treated as crosstalk and no sound will be produced. Although higher setting values are more effective in preventing crosstalk, they can also make it difficult to play softly on multiple pads at the same time. Settings TRG11 2. >tRG10 Snare 00% ” Crosstalk=35 ‚ 3. Move to the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11) using the [<]/[>] button and select (  ) T1 and T2 as the pads causing crosstalk in the snare. The setting made in Step 4 below will now be applied to trigger signals from pads T1 and T2. >tRG10 Snare 00% ”Sn=K t1=L t2=L‚ q >tRG11 Snare 00% ”Sn=K t1=L t2=L‚ Pads causing crosstalk 4. ”t3=L Ri=L Cr=K‚ w ”P:=K P;=K P<=K‚ w Crosstalk pads Use these parameters to select () the pads that tend to produce crosstalk in the pad indicated by q. The setting from the Crosstalk page (TRG10) will apply to these pads. No crosstalk elimination is performed for unselected pads (). Sn (Snare), T1 (Tom1), T2 (Tom2), T3 (Tom3), Ri (Ride), Cr (Crash), KK (Kick), P8 (Pad8), HH (HiHat), P10 (Pad10), P11 (Pad11), and P12 (Pad12) Move back to the Crosstalk page (TRG10) using the [<] button. Play pads T1 and T2 to determine the level of trigger signal they produce in the snare, and set the Crosstalk parameter to this level. >tRG10 Snare 00% ” Crosstalk=60 ‚ q Trigger input See q Trigger input from the description of the TRG2 page. 70 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Strike the snare pad to select it for crosstalk elimination. Pad triggered by crosstalk Crosstalk Pads Settings Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SAVE/ ENTER] button to access Menu Mode. Select the Trigger area (06:Trigger) and navigate to the Crosstalk page (TRG10). >tRG10 Snare 00% ” Crosstalk=35 ‚ 0 to 99 ”KK=L P8=K HH=K‚ Eliminating Crosstalk Level at which crosstalk does not occur 5. Verify that pads T1 and T2 no longer produce crosstalk in the snare. If necessary, store your settings (page 56). Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode TRG12 3. Copy Trigger Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to copy the pad. >tRG12 CopyPad ” 1:Snare≥Snare >tRG12 CopyPad Are you sure? On the Copy Trigger page, you can copy all settings for a specific pad into the current trigger setup from another. NOTICE CAUTION When you copy pad settings using the procedure described below, the current trigger setup’s settings will be modified but not stored (i.e., the asterisk (*) will be displayed). To make the change permanent, be sure to store your settings (page 56). If you select another kit or turn off the drum module without doing so, the trigger setup will revert to its original settings. 1. Whenever a pad is copied, all of the destination pad’s settings will be overwritten with those of the copied pad. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that the destination pad contains no irreplaceable settings. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button once again to copy the pad. To cancel the process without copying any data, press the [ ] button. Navigate to the Copy Trigger page and set both the trigger setup to copy from and the pad to be copied. >tRG12 CopyPad ” 1:Snare≥Snare 4. When the pad has been successfully copied, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. Number of trigger setup to copy from: Pad to be copied NOTE When the pad name is flashing, you can also select a different one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. 2. Move the cursor and set the destination pad (from the current drum trigger). >tRG12 CopyPad ” 2:tom1≥tom2 Destination pad NOTE When the destination pad is flashing, you can also select a different one by striking it or by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [<]/[>] buttons. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 71 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Trng3 07: Training Area Ignore Timing Training-related settings >trng3 ”Ignrtiming=off‚ The Training area is used to set training-function parameters. Trng1 q Timer >trng1 ” timer=off ‚ q Settings q Timer Use this parameter to set the practice timer used in Training Mode. The timer is started at the beginning of practice, and when it reaches the set time, the practice session will end automatically. Settings q IgnrTiming Use this parameter to specify whether or not the pads are to produce sounds when played out of time. When set to “on”, they will always produce a sound. off or on NOTE The above setting applies only to the following types of training. • Tempo Up/Down • Change Up • Pad Gate off, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s, 300s, 480s, and 600s Trng4 Pad Gate Group NOTE The above setting applies only to the following types of training. • Groove Check • Rhythm Gate • Measure Break • Tempo Up/Down • Change Up • Pad Gate Trng2 Difficulty Level >trng2 ” Difficulty=3 ‚ >trng4 ”Group=group1 q q Group Use this parameter to set which groups of pads the drum module should consider when deciding whether or not you are playing the song’s drum pattern correctly in Pad Gate training (page 46). Settings Description all pads Any pad will be scored, as long as the timing of your drumming is correct. group1 The kit is separated into five groups—kick, snare, toms, cymbals, and hi-hat. In order for your drumming to be scored, you must strike pads from the same group as those from the practice drum pattern and do so in time. group2 Similar to “group 1”, but all toms and cymbals are treated separately. In addition, the hi-hat pad and the hi-hat controller are also divided into separate groups. all note With this setting, you must play the drum pattern exactly as it is in the song. q q Difficulty Use this parameter to set the training difficulty level. The larger the setting, the more difficult the training. Settings 1 to 5 NOTE The above setting applies only to the following types of training. • Tempo Up/Down • Change Up • Pad Gate ‚ NOTE The above setting applies only to Pad Gate training. 72 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode Trng5 Fast Blast Timer 08: System Area >trng5 ”Blasttimer= 10s System settings The System area is used to configure the drum module’s system and also to set parameters that affect all kits and songs. q q BlastTimer Use this parameter to set the practice time for Fast Blast training (page 49). The timer is started at the beginning of practice, and when it reaches the set time, the practice session will end automatically. Settings 10s, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s, 300s, 480s, and 600s NOTE The above setting applies only to Fast Blast training. System1 Kit Lock >System1 ” KitLock=off ‚ q q KitLock By default, the drum module automatically chooses the most appropriate drum kit whenever you select a different song. Set the KitLock parameter to “on” if you would like the current kit to be retained when changing songs. Settings off or on NOTE Regardless of the KitLock setting, you can change kits freely using the control panel. System2 Muted Volume >System2 ”DrumMuteVol= 0‚ q q DrumMuteVol Use this parameter to set the volume of the drum parts when muted with [DRUM MUTE]. Settings 0 to 10 NOTE When DrumMuteVol is set to “0”, the drum parts will be totally silent when muted. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 73 Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode System3 Master Equalizer >System3 MEQ ”Lo=+ 2 Hi=+ 2 ‚ q q q OutSel Use this parameter to specify where metronome sounds are to be output. Settings Description mix The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT [L/ MONO] and [R] jacks. clickL The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT [L/ MONO] jack only; drum and song sounds are output in mono via the OUTPUT [R] jack. clickR The metronome is routed to the OUTPUT [R] jack only; drum and song sounds are output in mono via the OUTPUT [L/MONO] jack. 0 to +12 w Hi Use this parameter to set the master equalizer’s high-end gain in dB. The higher the value, the more the high end will be boosted. Settings >System6 Click ”OutSel=mix ‚ w q Lo The drum module features a two-band shelving equalizer as its master EQ. Use this parameter to set the equalizer’s lowend gain in dB. The higher the value, the more the low end will be boosted. Settings Metronome Output System6 0 to +12 NOTE System4 The above setting also applies to output from the [PHONES] jack. Master Tuning >System4 Mtune ” tune=+ 0 ‚ >System7 LED ” Disp=tempo q q Tune Use this parameter to set the tuning for songs in steps of one cent. Settings -100 to +100 NOTE The above parameter has no effect on drum kit sounds. System5 Number Display Function System7 q q Disp Use this parameter to specify what is to be shown by the number display. Settings Description tempo Current tempo mode Mode-specific content as follows. • Kit area: Kit number • Training Mode: Current tempo • Song area: Song number • Recording: Current tempo • Metronome area: Click Set number (current tempo on Tap Tempo page only) • Menu Mode: No display (trigger setup number in Trigger area only) • All other times: No display timer Metronome timer. Training timer when in Training Mode. Local Control >System5 ”LocalCtrl=on ‚ q q LocalCtrl Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) playing of the internal tone generator using the pads and songs. When set to “off”, the tone generator is essentially disconnected from the pads and controllers, which will be unable to generate any sound. Settings off or on 74 DTX502 Owner’s Manual ‚ NOTE In cases where the above parameter is not set to “tempo”, the number display will show the tempo for several seconds after it is changed by one of the following actions. • Turning the Data Dial with the [SHIFT] button held down • Operating a pad controller whose function has been set to “tempo” (page 62) • Striking a pad whose pad function has been set to “inc tempo”, “dec tempo”, or “tap tempo” (page 66) Advanced Techniques Setting Parameters using Menu Mode System8 Auto Power-Off System10 >System8 ” AutoPwrOff=30 ‚ >System: ” Factory Set q q AutoPwrOff Use this parameter to set the time until the Auto Power-Off function activates (page 13) or to disable (“off”) this function. Settings Using the procedure described below, you can return all User data (i.e., kits, click sets, trigger setups, and songs) to the default settings. CAUTION When you reset parameters as described below, any changes you have made to them will be lost. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that they contain no irreplaceable settings. off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, and 120 (min) NOTE • Settings for the Auto Power-Off function do not represent exact times and there may be some variation. • The drum module automatically stores its system settings before turning off automatically. System9 1. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the Factory Set page. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to proceed. Restore >System9 ” Restore >System: FactSet Are you sure? To cancel the process without restoring default settings, press the [ ] button. ‚ Using the Restore function as described below, you can return all User data (i.e., kits, click sets, trigger setups, and songs) to the settings they had when you last turned on the drum module. 2. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to reset the parameters. >System: FactSet Executing... CAUTION When you reset parameters using the Restore function, any changes you have made to them since last turning on the drum module will be lost. Before proceeding, therefore, you should ensure that these parameters contain no irreplaceable settings. 1. 3. >System9 Restore Are you sure? To cancel the Restore process, press the [ 3. 4. When the parameters have been successfully reset, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. NOTE Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button on the Restore page. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to proceed. You can also restore the Factory Set by turning on the drum module with both the [<] and [>] buttons held down (page 14) 4. 2. Factory Set When the Factory Set has been restored, the drum module will automatically restart and the Initial Setup page will be displayed (page 13). ] button. Press the [SAVE/ENTER] button to reset the parameters. When the parameters have been successfully reset, the message “Completed.” will be displayed. The drum module will automatically restart. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 75 Advanced Techniques Integrating Separately Sold Accessories You can also expand your electronic drum kit with various accessories* for an even more enjoyable drumming experience. (*: Sold separately) The following describes how to add a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad and a KU100 Kick Unit. If adding a different accessory, be sure to read the description of the Pad Type page from Menu Mode (page 68). Adding a PCY90AT Cymbal Pad 1. 2. Using a KU100 Kick Unit as a Kick Pedal Turn off the drum module. By connecting a KU100 Kick Unit as described below, you can add a compact, quiet-type kick pedal to your electronic drum kit. Assemble the PCY90AT to your drum kit. Using the cable that came with the PCY90AT, connect it to the [PAD>IN] jack on the KP65 Kick Pad. 1. 2. Turn off the drum module. Plug one end of the cable that came with the KU100 into its [OUTPUT] jack. KU100 Pad OUTPUT KP65 3. NOTE The PCY90AT Cymbal Pad can also be connected to the [wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1], or [rTOM3/!2] jack. In order to do so, you will need a Y cable (sold separately). See page 11 for more details. 3. Connect the [OUT>DTX] jack on the KP65 to the [uKICK/i] trigger input jack on the drum module. DTX502 4. 5. KP65 DTX502 4. 5. Plug the other end of the cable into the drum module’s [uKICK/i] trigger input jack. Turn on the drum module. Choose the correct pad type for the PCY90AT. For details on how to do so, see the description of the Pad Type page from Menu Mode (page 68). Specifically, you should set “Pad8” as the trigger input and set the Pad Type parameter to “PCY90”. 76 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Turn on the drum module. Choose the correct pad type for the KU100. For details on how to do so, see the description of the Pad Type page from Menu Mode (page 68). Specifically, you should set “Kick” as the trigger input and set the Pad Type parameter to “KU100”. Advanced Techniques Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums The following describes a couple of examples of how you can integrate electronic and acoustic drums. Adding Drum Pads to an Acoustic Drum Set By attaching a CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment and a drum holder to the cymbal stand from an acoustic drum kit, you can easily add an electronic drum pad such as the TP70, XP70, or XP80 to that kit. The following diagram shows a typical example of how the various components can be set up. When assembled, remember to set the Pad Type parameter (page 68) to match the drum pad being used. Playing the DTX502 Using Acoustic Drums You can attach a DT10 or DT20 Drum Trigger to the head or shell of an acoustic drum to send a trigger signal to your drum module whenever the drum is struck. DT10 or DT20 Drum Trigger Holder To DTX502 Electronic drum pad (TP70, XP70, or XP80, etc.) Cymbal stand  Typical setup DT10/DT20 DT10/DT20 CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment  Typical setup DTX502 XP80 KP65 DTX502 If connecting an acoustic drum via a DT10 or DT20 Drum Trigger in this way, choose the appropriate DT10/DT20 setting for the Pad Type parameter. See page 68 for more details. NOTE • If you wish to play User Waves, refer to the Reference Manual (page 79). • If the acoustic drum produces multiple sounds when hit, adjust the settings of the Minimum Level parameter (page 68), the Reject Time parameter (page 69 ), and the Noise Filter parameter (page 69). • If the sensitivity of the drum trigger seems to low, adjust the settings of the Gain parameter (page 68) and the Wait Time parameter (page 69). DTX502 Owner’s Manual 77 Advanced Techniques Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums Mounting the DTX502 on a Hi-Hat Stand The drum module can be conveniently mounted on a hi-hat stand using a CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment. The following diagram shows a typical example of how the various components can be set up.  Typical setup Hi-hat stand DTX502 CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment Hi-hat stand DTX502 CSAT924A Cymbal Stand Attachment 78 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Advanced Techniques Connecting to a Computer  Precautions when using the [USB TO Making Connections While your DTX502 is highly powerful and versatile all by itself, you can connect it to a computer via USB for even greater convenience and flexibility. When connected in this way, MIDI and audio-file data can be freely exchanged with the computer, allowing the drum module to be used as an input device for music production applications. In this section, you’ll learn how to make the necessary connections. NOTE As the drum module has no built-in speakers, you will need to connect headphones or loudspeakers in order to hear it. For details, see page 12. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the drum module. Start up your computer. Shut down all applications before proceeding to the next step. Connect a USB cable first to the drum module’s [USB TO HOST] terminal and then to the computer. [USB TO HOST] terminal (DTX502 rear panel) If proper care is not taken when connecting your drum module to a computer via the [USB TO HOST] terminal, either or both of the devices may freeze or data may become corrupted or be permanently lost. Be sure, therefore, to observe the following precautions at this time. If the drum module or computer should freeze, restart the application being used, reboot the computer, or turn the drum module off once and then back on. NOTICE • Use a USB A-B cable of less than 3 meters in length. Do not use a USB 3.0 cable. • Before connecting to a computer via the [USB TO HOST] terminal, restore it from any power-saving mode (such as Suspend, Sleep, or Standby). • Connect your computer via the [USB TO HOST] terminal before turning on the drum module. • Be sure to always perform the following steps before turning the drum module on or off and either plugging in or unplugging a USB cable. • Shut down all applications. • Ensure that no data is being sent from the drum module. (Data is transmitted by striking the pads and by playing songs.) • Always wait for at least six seconds between turning the drum module on and off and between plugging in and unplugging a USB cable. USB terminal Computer DTX502 Reference Manual USB cable 4. HOST] terminal Drum module Turn on the drum module. You will now be able to exchange data between the drum module and computer. The Reference Manual for the DTX502 is made available as a PDF document and contains the following. • Instructions on how to transfer song and audio data from your computer to the drum module. • Reference material that will prove useful when making music using the drum module and a computer • MIDI-related reference information  Yamaha USB-MIDI driver In most situations, there is no need to install the Yamaha USB-MIDI driver and the above setup procedure will suffice. If, however, your computer is having difficulty communicating with the drum module, please download the standard Yamaha USB-MIDI driver from the following web page and install it on your computer. The Reference Manual is available for download as a PDF file from the following web page. http://download.yamaha.com/ *: Yamaha Corporation reserves the right to modify this URL at any time without prior notice. http://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE • Information on system requirements is also provided on the above web page. • The USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Before installing, please visit the above web page to confirm that you have the most up-to-date version. DTX502 Owner’s Manual 79 Reference Error Messages Reference Memory full. No memory is available for User songs. Please delete unneeded User songs before recording. Seq data is not empty. Recording was carried out with a Preset song selected, but no memory is available for User songs. Backup error! 80 DTX502 Owner’s Manual • User data could not be stored when the drum module was turned off. • After displaying this error message, the Factory Set will be automatically restored. Reference Troubleshooting In addition to the following, you can also find troubleshooting tips in the Reference Manual (PDF). See page 79 for details on downloading this manual. No sound is produced when a pad is struck or the volume is lower than expected.  Check connections as follows. • Ensure that the pads are properly connected to the drum module’s trigger input jacks. • Ensure that the drum module is properly connected to headphones or other audio equipment, such as an amplifier and/ or speakers. • Ensure that the amplifier and/or speakers connected to the drum module are turned on and are not set to the lowest possible volume. • If you are using a KP65 Kick Pad, try adjusting its Level dial. • Ensure that the cables you are using are in good condition.  Check the drum module’s settings as follows. • Ensure that volumes are set appropriately. (See pages 15, 19, 24, and 59.) • Ensure that the voice for the pad you are striking is not set to “No Assign”. No sound is produced with this setting. (See pages 21 and 59.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Decay page (KitV6) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 59.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Cutoff Frequency page (KitV7) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 59.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Function page (Pad3) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Velocity Curve page (TRG2) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 67.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page (TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Local Control page (System5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 74.)  If you cannot play foot closed hi-hat sounds, try the following. • Ensure that you are operating the hi-hat controller in a firm and full manner. • Ensure that the parameter on the Double Bass Switch page (KitC1) from Menu Mode is set to “off”. (See page 61.) • Lower the setting of the parameter on the Foot Close Position page (Pad2) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)  If edge and cup sounds cannot be played or the choking technique does not work when using a cymbal pad, try the following. • Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • If using a PCY100 Cymbal Pad as the hi-hat, ensure that the cup switch (CUP SW) on the rear of the pad is set to the ON position in order to play cup sounds. (See page 17.) Sounds or volumes are not as expected.  If hi-hat splash sounds are not produced as expected, try the following. • Adjust the parameter setting on the Hi-hat Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity page (Pad1) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)  If it is difficult to produce closed hi-hat sounds, try the following. • Adjust the parameter setting on the Foot Close Position page (Pad2) from Menu Mode. (See page 65.)  If it is difficult to produce quieter hi-hat sounds, try the following. • Check whether the parameter on the Double Bass Switch page (KitC1) is set to “on”. In certain cases, this setting can make it more difficult to produce quieter hi-hat sounds. (See page 61.)  If sounds cannot be produced as expected when playing the pads connected to the [wTOM1/!0], [eTOM2/!1], [rTOM3/!2], and/or [uKICK/i] trigger input jack, try the following. • Check whether you have connected a two- or three-zone pad to the jack in question. In certain situations, this can result in unexpected sounds being produced. If this is the case, set the parameter on the Pad Type page (TRG3) from Menu Mode to “off”. (See page 68.)  If sounds are distorted, try the following. • Lower the drum module’s master volume. (See page 15.)  If voices play endlessly and do not stop, try the following. • Press the [KIT] button several times to silence all voices.  If pads are producing only sounds at very high volumes (i.e., high velocities), try the following. • Adjust the sensitivity of the drum module’s kits. (See page 19.) • Adjust the parameter on the Velocity Curve page (TRG2) from Menu Mode. (See page 67.) • Adjust the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu Mode. High settings will result in loud drum sounds. (See page 68.) • Ensure that you are using only the recommended Yamaha pads. (Products from other manufacturers can output excessively large signals.)  If the volumes of sounds produced by different pads are poorly balanced, try the following. • Adjust the volumes of the various input groups on the Mixer page (MIXER) from Menu Mode. (See page 57.) • Adjust the volumes of individual input sources on the Volume page (KitV3) from Menu Mode. (See page 59.)  If reverb cannot be applied, try the following. • Ensure that the reverb level on the Mixer page (MIXER) from Menu Mode is not set too low. (See page 57.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Send (Source) page (KitV11) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 60.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Send (Voices) page (KitC2) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 61.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Type page (KitC3) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Reverb Return page (KitC4) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.)  If the drum module’s volume is not well balanced with that of the device connected to the [AUX IN] jack (such as a portable music player), try the following. • Ensure that the volume of the connected device is set to a suitable level. (See page 12.)  If the volume of your drumming is not well balanced with that of a drum-module song, try the following. • Adjust the song volume. (See page 26.) DTX502 Owner’s Manual 81 Reference Troubleshooting If you notice double triggering, crosstalk, or skipped sounds (as described below), try the following.  Double triggering—i.e., multiple sounds are produced in response to a single strike: • If the pad or drum trigger in question features a controller for adjusting output or sensitivity, turn it down. • Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu Mode is not set too high. (See page 68.)  Crosstalk is occurring—i.e., a sound is produced by a pad other than the one that was struck. • Ensure that the parameter on the Trigger Setup page (TRG1) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page (TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Reject Time page (TRG7) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 69.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.) • Ensure that the parameters on the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11) from Menu Mode are set appropriately. (See page 70.) • If using a pad featuring a level adjuster, ensure that it is set appropriately.  Skipped sounds—i.e., a pad does not produce a sound (usually during rolls or fills): • Ensure that the parameter on the Reject Time page (TRG7) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 69.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.)  If hi-hat sounds are occasionally produced even though the hi-hat controller is configured to produce a kick drum sound (i.e., DblBass is set to “on”), try the following. • Increase the setting of the parameter on the Minimum Level page (TRG5) from Menu Mode. Note that if this setting is too high, it may become difficult to play the hi-hat. (See page 68.)  If only one voice is triggered when two pads are played simultaneously, try the following. • Ensure that the parameter on the Trigger Setup page (TRG1) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 66.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Gain page (TRG4) from Menu Mode is set appropriately for the pad that does not trigger a voice. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Minimum Level page (TRG5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately for the pad that does not trigger a voice. (See page 68.) • Ensure that the parameter on the Crosstalk page (TRG10) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 70.) • Ensure that the parameters on the Crosstalk Pads page (TRG11) from Menu Mode are set appropriately. (See page 70.) • Ensure that both pads are not assigned to the same group on the Alternate Group page (KitV13) from Menu Mode. (See page 61.) Optional add-on products do not operate as expected.  If consistent, reliable trigger signals cannot be produced using a drum trigger attached to an acoustic drum, try the following. • Read the section Integrating Electronic & Acoustic Drums. (See page 77.) • Mute the head if it is vibrating in an irregular fashion. • Ensure that the drum trigger is attached in the vicinity of the rim and not near the center of the head. • Ensure that the drum trigger makes contact only with the drum.  If a pad controller does not work as expected, try the following. • Ensure that you are using a pad featuring a pad controller. • Ensure that the parameter on the Pad Control page (KitC5) from Menu Mode is set appropriately. (See page 62.) • Avoid holding the rim while operating the pad controller as this can prevent it from working properly. Other common questions  How do I make the drum module store its settings? • The drum module automatically stores its system settings whenever you turn it off using the [ ] (Standby/On) button. • Do not turn off the drum module by unplugging the power adaptor: It will not be able to store its system settings in such a case. • User settings for kits, click sets, and triggers must be stored manually. (See pages 25, 37, and 56.)  How do I reset all of the drum module’s parameters to their default settings? • Use the function on the Factory Set page (System10) from Menu Mode to restore the default settings. (See page 75.)  How do I reset all of the drum module’s parameters to the settings they had when I last turned it on? • Use the function on the Restore page (System9) from Menu Mode. (See page 75.)  How do I stop the drum module turning off before I’m finished using it? • Set the parameter on the Auto Power-Off page (System8) from Menu Mode to “off”. (See page 75.)  Why won’t a selected song play? • If the song you selected contains no data, the drum module will not be able to play it.  How do I stop the drum module changing the current drum kit when I select a different song? • By default, your drum module always chooses the best kit for each song. To prevent it from doing so, set the parameter on the Kit Lock page (System1) from Menu Mode to “on”. (See page 73.)  How do I have my drum module choose the best drum kit for each song? • Set the parameter on the Kit Lock page (System1) from Menu Mode to “off”. (See page 73.)  What should I do if I can’t hear a song’s drum parts? • Ensure that the drum parts have not been muted. (See page 27.)  My training scores are strange. Why is this? • Crosstalk could be triggering sounds unintentionally as you drum. See the above section Crosstalk is occurring. 82 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Reference Data List  Preset Kit List No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Name Maple Custom Modern Rock Elect Dub1 Bop Kit Vintage 50s Funk Kit Trance PWR Big Kit Metal Kit Percs Master Oak Custom Birch Custom Beech Custom Vintage 70s Garage Punk Hard Rock Legend RX Funk Master 70s NY Jazz Kit Acid Jazz Deep Brush Reggae Kit Elect Dub2 Weapon X Dub Electro Pop Gate Kit Digi Rock DNB Chill Out Izzle’s R&B1 Izzle’s R&B2 ButiqHipHop1 ButiqHipHop2 Hexagon Beat Box8 Beat Box9 MG Kit Deep Kit Vocal Drums Drum Corps Orchestra Cuban Brazil Africa Arabic Indian Pop China Japan GM Kit  Song List No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Type Demo Practice Pad Song  Instrument Name List Name Demo Rock Mix FunkRock SkatePnk HardRock HvyMetal 5/4PrgRk RckShfle ClsShfle 80sShfle 8beatFnk R&B Funk CoolFunk MedBlues SlwBlues HipHop 1 HipHop 2 R&B 1 R&B 2 ModnSoul ElecDub1 ElecDub2 ElecDub3 ElectPop Dance TrncePWR Soul Pop 6/8 Pop 8beatPop 16beatRk ModnBald PowerBld MedSwing FstSwing Bossa LatinSmb Songo Reggae Funk C Funk F FunkOrgn Dance 1 Dance 2 Dance 3 DanceSeq ChilOut1 ChilOut2 ChilOut3 DigiRck1 DigiRck2 DigiRck3 RollFill TrancSeq Bongo Conga 1 Conga 2 Shaker Tambrin Triangle Samba  Kick No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  Snare Name No Assign MapleC 22 OakC 22-1 OakC 22-2 BirchC 22 BeechC 22 Rock Metal HardRock Vtg70s 24 Vtg70s24Mt Vtg50s 22 Vtg50s22Mt Jazz RX5 T8-1 T8-2 T8 Down T9-1 T9-2 T9 Hard Sm ElecComp Trance PWR Gate 1 Gate 2 Electric 1 Electric 2 Electric 3 Electric 4 Electric 5 Electric 6 Electric 7 Electric 8 R&B 1 R&B 2 R&B 3 HipHop 1 HipHop 2 HipHop 3 HipHop 4 HipHop 5 HipHop 6 HipHop 7 HipHop 8 Break 1 Break 2 DNB 1 DNB 2 No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Name No Assign MapleCustm OakCustom BirchCustm BeechCustm Rock Metal HardRock Vintage70s Vintage50s Funk DeepOak Jazz Deep Brush RX T8 T9 Sm Synth Analog MG Snare TrancePWR1 TrancePWR2 Gate 1 Gate 2 Gate 3 Gate 4 Gate 5 Gate 6 Gate 7 Gate 8 Electro 1 Electro 2 Electro 3 Electro 4 Electro 5 Electro 6 Electro 7 Electro 8 Electro 9 Electro 10 R&B 1 R&B 2 R&B 3 HipHop Break 1 Break 2 DNB DTX502 Owner’s Manual 83 Reference Data List  Tom No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76  Cymbal Name No Assign MapleC H MapleC M MapleC L OakC H OakC M OakC L BirchC H BirchC M BirchC L BeechC H BeechC M BeechC L Rock H Rock M Rock L Metal H Metal M Metal L HardRock H HardRock M HardRock L Vintg70s H Vintg70s M Vintg70s L Vintg50s H Vintg50s M Vintg50s L Jazz H Jazz M Jazz L Brush H Brush M Brush L Marching H Marching M Marching L RX5 H RX5 M RX5 L T8-1 H T8-1 M T8-1 L T8-2 H T8-2 M T8-2 L T9 H T9 M T9 L Sm H Sm M Sm L Synth H Synth M Synth L Big H Big M Big L Gate 1 H Gate 1 M Gate 1 L Gate 2 H Gate 2 M Gate 2 L Gate 3 H Gate 3 M Gate 3 L Noise H Noise M Noise L Electric 1 Electric 2 Electric 3 Amb Tom DNB H DNB M DNB L 84 DTX502 Owner’s Manual No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Name No Assign Bright 18 Warm 16 Dark 18-1 Dark 18-2 Vivid 17 Thin 16 Vintage 18 Vintage 16 Jazz 18 Bright 20 WarmRd 20 Dark 20-1 Dark 20-2 VtgRd 22 JazzRd 22 SzRide 20 Bright 18R China 19 China 17 Splash 1 Splash 2 Trash RX Cymbal RX Ride T8 Crash T9 Crash T8 Ride T9 Ride MG Ride SynCrash 1 SynCrash 2 ElecCym 1 ElecCym 2 ElecCym 3 ElecCym 4 ElecCym 5 ElecCym 6 ElecCym 7 ElecCym 8 ElecRide 1 ElecRide 2 ElecRide 3 ElecRide 4 HipHopCr 1 HipHopCr 2 HipHopCr 3 HipHopCr 4 HipHopCr 5 HipHopRd Lo-Fi Cym NoiseCym 1 NoiseCym 2 NoiseCym 3 RevCym 1 RevCym 2 Vo China Vo Ride  Hi-Hat No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Name No Assign Bright 14 Dark 14-1 Dark 14-2 Cool 14 Vintage 14 Jazz 14 Brush RX T8 T9 Electro 1 Electro 2 Electro 3 Dubstep R&B 1 R&B 2 R&B 3 HipHop 1 HipHop 2 ChillOut DNB Vo HH  Percussion No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Name No Assign Conga H SW Conga L SW Bongo H SW Bongo L SW Timbales H Timbales L Surdo SW PndeiroOp PndeiroTap PndeiroShk PndeiroSld Tambarin 1 Tambarin 2 Cowbell1SW Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Claves Maracas TriangleOp TriangleMt GuiroShort GuiroLong Agogo H Agogo L WoodBlockH WoodBlockL Shaker 1 Shaker 2 Caxixi Hit Whistle S Whistle L Djambe Lo Djambe Op Djambe Slp Djambe Mt Cajion Lo Cajion Ft Cajion Slp Cajion Mt TalkDr Op PotDrum Op Dundun Op Dundun Cl Darbuka Op Darbuka Sl Darbuka Mt Sangban Op Kenkeni Op AfricanBlH AfricanBlL Tombak Op Daf Open Daf Slap Daf Mute Riq Open Riq Slap Riq Shake Riq Hit Sagat Op Sagat Cl Sagat SW Tabla Na Bayan Ge Dhol RH Op Dhol RH Cl Dhol LH Op Dhol LH Cl KanjiraHit KanjiraSlp KanjiraShk No. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Name ZangGu ZangGu Rim BianGu BianGu Rim BianGuHand TangGu TangGu Rim PaiGu 1 PaiGu 2 PaiGu 3 XiaoBo Opn XiaoBo Cls DaBo Opn DaBo Cls XiaoLuo ZhongLuo FengLuo ShangNao 1 ShangNao 2 Qing H Qing L Taiko Don Taiko Ka KoTaik1Ten KoTaik1Tsu KoTaik2Ten KoTaik2Tsu TsuzumiPon TsuzumiBnd OokawaChon Temple Blk KontikiKon Kontiki Ki Atari Kon Atari Chi Ainote 1 Ainote 2 GranCasaOp Field Sn FldSn OpRm FldSn ClRm OrchSn OrchSnOpRm OrchSnClRm OrTambHtOp OrTambHtCl OrTambHtSk Castanet Vibraslap SleighBel WindChime HandCym Op HandCym Mt FingrCymOp RibonCrash Timpani Tamtam Reference Data List  Voice List  Effect No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 Name No Assign ElecPerc 1 ElecPerc 2 ElecPerc 3 ElecPerc 4 ElecPerc 5 ElecPerc 6 ElecPerc 7 ElecPerc 8 ElecPerc 9 ElecPerc10 ElecPerc11 ElecPerc12 ElecPerc13 ElecPerc14 ElecPerc15 ElecPerc16 ElecPerc17 ElecPerc18 ElecPerc19 ElecPerc20 ElecPerc21 ElecPerc22 ElecPerc23 ElecPerc24 An Cowbell An Claves An Shaker ElcClaves1 ElcClaves2 ElecShaker HiQ Zap NLZap SynPerc ClickDelay An Clap T9 Clap HandClap HHopClap 1 HHopClap 2 HHopClap 3 HHopClap 4 HHopClap 5 HHopClap 6 HHopClap 7 HHopClap 8 HHopClap 9 HHopClap10 HHopClap11 HHopClap12 HHopSnap 1 HHopSnap 2 HHopSnap 3 HipHop FX XfdSnare 1 XfdSnare 2 XfdSnare 3 MG Kick 1 MG Kick 2 MG Kick 3 MG Kick 4 MG Kick 5 MG Kick 6 MG Snare 1 MG Snare 2 MG FX 1 MG FX 2 Synth 1 Synth 2 Synth 3 Vo Kick Vo Snare Vo SnOp Vo SnClR Vo Tom H Vo Tom M Vo Tom L  Kick No. 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 Name Vo HH Op Vo HH OpE Vo HH Cl Vo HH ClE Vo HH Ft Vo HH Sp Vo Ride Vo China Vo Cowbell Vo Clap Lazer 1 Lazer 2 Noise 1 Noise 2 WhiteNoise Raspberry SE 1 SE 2 SE 3 SE 4 SE 5 SE 6 SE 7 SE 8 Uh Hey One Two Three Four Clk 1 Acc Clk 1 4th Clk 1 8th Clk 1 16th Clk 1 Trp Clk 2 Acc Clk 2 Beat Clk 3 Acc Clk 3 Beat Clk 4 Acc Clk 4 Beat No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  Snare Name No Assign MapleC 22 OakC 22-1 OakC 22-2 BirchC 22 BeechC 22 Rock Metal HardRock Vtg70s 24 Vtg70s24Mt Vtg50s 22 Vtg50s22Mt Jazz RX5 T8-1 T8-2 T8 Down T9-1 T9-2 T9 Hard Sm ElecComp Trance PWR Gate 1 Gate 2 Electric 1 Electric 2 Electric 3 Electric 4 Electric 5 Electric 6 Electric 7 Electric 8 R&B 1 R&B 2 R&B 3 HipHop 1 HipHop 2 HipHop 3 HipHop 4 HipHop 5 HipHop 6 HipHop 7 HipHop 8 Break 1 Break 2 DNB 1 DNB 2 No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 Name No Assign MapleCustm MapleCOpRm MapleCClRm MapleCOff MapleCOpOf MapleCClOf OakCustom OakC OpRm OakC ClRm OakC Off OakC OpOf OakC ClOf BirchCustm BirchCOpRm BirchCClRm BirchC Off BirchCOpOf BirchCClOf BeechCustm BeechCOpRm BeechCClRm BeechC Off BeechCOpOf BeechCClOf Rock Rock OpRm Rock ClRm Rock Off Rock OpOf Rock ClOf Metal Metal OpRm Metal ClRm Metal Off Metal OpOf Metal ClOf HardRock HRock OpRm HRock ClRm HRock Off HRock OpOf HRock ClOf Vintage70s Vtg70sOpRm Vtg70sClRm Vtg70s Off Vtg70sOpOf Vtg70sClOf Vintage50s Vtg50sOpRm Vtg50sClRm Vtg50s Off Vtg50sOpOf Vtg50sClOf Funk Funk OpRim Funk ClRim Funk Off Funk OpOf Funk ClOf DeepOak DpOak OpRm DpOak ClRm DpOak Off DpOak OpOf DpOak ClOf Jazz Jazz OpRim Jazz ClRim Jazz Off Jazz OpOf Jazz ClOf Brush Brush OpRm Amb Rim No. 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 Name RX11-1 RX11-2 RX5-1 RX5-2 RX11 Rim RX5 Rim T8-1 T8-2 T9-1 T9-2 T8 Rim T9 Rim Sm Synth Analog Analog Rim TrancePWR1 TrancePWR2 Gate 1 Gate 2 Gate 3 Gate 4 Gate 5 Gate 6 Gate 7 Gate 8 Gate Rim Electro 1 Electro 2 Electro 3 Electro 4 Electro 5 Electro 6 Electro 7 Electro 8 Electro 9 Electro 10 ElectroRim R&B 1 R&B 2 R&B 3 R&B 1 Rim R&B 2 Rim R&B 3 Rim HipHop Break 1 Break 2 Break Rim DNB 1 DNB 2 DNB 3 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 85 Reference Data List  Tom No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76  Cymbal Name No Assign MapleC H MapleC M MapleC L OakC H OakC M OakC L BirchC H BirchC M BirchC L BeechC H BeechC M BeechC L Rock H Rock M Rock L Metal H Metal M Metal L HardRock H HardRock M HardRock L Vintg70s H Vintg70s M Vintg70s L Vintg50s H Vintg50s M Vintg50s L Jazz H Jazz M Jazz L Brush H Brush M Brush L Marching H Marching M Marching L RX5 H RX5 M RX5 L T8-1 H T8-1 M T8-1 L T8-2 H T8-2 M T8-2 L T9 H T9 M T9 L Sm H Sm M Sm L Synth H Synth M Synth L Big H Big M Big L Gate 1 H Gate 1 M Gate 1 L Gate 2 H Gate 2 M Gate 2 L Gate 3 H Gate 3 M Gate 3 L Noise H Noise M Noise L Electric 1 Electric 2 Electric 3 Amb Tom DNB H DNB M DNB L 86 DTX502 Owner’s Manual No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 Name No Assign Bright18 Bright18Eg Bright18Cp Warm 16 Warm 16Eg Warm 16Cp Dark18-1 Dark18-1Eg Dark18-1Cp Dark18-2 Dark18-2Eg Dark18-2Cp Vivid 17 Vivid 17Eg Vivid 17Cp Thin 16 Thin 16Eg Thin 16Cp Vintage 18 Vintg 18Eg Vintg 18Cp Vintage 16 Vintg 16Eg Vintg 16Cp Jazz 18 Jazz 18Eg Jazz 18Cp Bright20 Bright20Eg Bright20Cp WarmRd20 WarmRd20Eg WarmRd20Cp Dark20-1 Dark20-1Eg Dark20-1Cp Dark20-2 Dark20-2Eg Dark20-2Cp VtgRd 22 VtgRd 22Eg VtgRd 22Cp JazzRd22 JazzRd22Eg JazzRd22Cp SzRide 20 SzRd 20Eg SzRd 20Cp Bright18R China 19 China 17 Splash 1 Splash 2 Trash RX11 Crash RX5 Crash RX11 Ride RX5 RdEg RX5 RdCp T8 Crash T9 Crash T8 Ride T9 Ride SynCrash 1 SynCrash 2 ElecCym 1 ElecCym 2 ElecCym 3 ElecCym 4 ElecCym 5 ElecCym 6 ElecCym 7 ElecCym 8  Hi-Hat No. 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Name ElecRide 1 ElecRd 1Eg ElecRd 1Cp ElecRd 2Cp ElecRide 3 ElecRide 4 HipHopCr 1 HipHopCr 2 HipHopCr 3 HipHopCr 4 HipHopCr 5 HipHopRd HipHopRdCp Lo-Fi Cym NoiseCym 1 NoiseCym 2 NoiseCym 3 RevCym 1 RevCym 2 No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 Name No Assign Bright14Op Brt14OpEg Brt14OpCp Bright14Cl Brt14ClEg Brt14ClCp Bright14Ft Bright14Sp Dark14-1Op Dk14-1OpEg Dk14-1OpCp Dark14-1Cl Dk14-1ClEg Dk14-1ClCp Dark14-1Ft Dark14-1Sp Dark14-2Op Dk14-2OpEg Dk14-2OpCp Dark14-2Cl Dk14-2ClEg Dk14-2ClCp Dark14-2Ft Dark14-2Sp Cool14 Op Cool14OpEg Cool14OpCp Cool14 Cl Cool14ClEg Cool14ClCp Cool14 Ft Cool14 Sp Vintg14 Op Vtg14 OpEg Vtg14 OpCp Vintg14 Cl Vtg14 ClEg Vtg14 ClCp Vintg14 Ft Vintg14 Sp Jazz14 Op Jazz14OpEg Jazz14OpCp Jazz14 Cl Jazz14ClEg Jazz14ClCp Jazz14 Ft Jazz14 Sp RX11 Op RX5 Op RX11 Cl RX5 Cl T8 Op T8 Cl T9 Op T9 Cl Elec1 Op Elec1 OpEg Elec1 Cl Elec1 ClEg Elec1 Ft Elec1 Sp Elec2 Op Elec2 OpEg Elec2 Cl Elec2 ClEg Elec2 Ft Elec2 Sp Elec3 Op Elec3 OpEg Elec3 Cl Elec3 ClEg Elec4 Cl No. 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 Name R&B1 Op R&B1 Cl R&B1 Ft R&B1 Sp R&B2 Op R&B2 Ft R&B3 Op R&B3 Cl R&B3 Ft HipHop1 Op HHop1 OpEg HipHop1 Cl HHop1 ClEg HipHop1 Ft HipHop2 Op HipHop2 Cl HHop2 ClEg HipHop2 Ft DNB Op DNB Cl DNB Ft Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 Machine 4 Analog 1 Analog 2 Analog 3 Analog 4 Analog 5 FX HiHat Reference Data List  Percussion No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Name No Assign Conga H SW Conga L SW Bongo H SW Bongo L SW Timbales H Timbales L Surdo SW PndeiroOp PndeiroTap PndeiroShk PndeiroSld Tambarin 1 Tambarin 2 Cowbell1SW Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Claves Maracas TriangleOp TriangleMt GuiroShort GuiroLong Agogo H Agogo L WoodBlockH WoodBlockL Shaker 1 Shaker 2 Caxixi Hit Whistle S Whistle L Djambe Lo Djambe Op Djambe Slp Djambe Mt Cajion Lo Cajion Ft Cajion Slp Cajion Mt TalkDr Op PotDrum Op Dundun Op Dundun Cl Darbuka Op Darbuka Sl Darbuka Mt Sangban Op Kenkeni Op AfricanBlH AfricanBlL Tombak Op Daf Open Daf Slap Daf Mute Riq Open Riq Slap Riq Shake Riq Hit Sagat Op Sagat Cl Sagat SW Tabla Na Bayan Ge Dhol RH Op Dhol RH Cl Dhol LH Op Dhol LH Cl KanjiraHit KanjiraSlp KanjiraShk ZangGu ZangGu Rim  Effect No. 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Name BianGu BianGu Rim BianGuHand TangGu TangGu Rim PaiGu 1 PaiGu 2 PaiGu 3 XiaoBo Opn XiaoBo Cls DaBo Opn DaBo Cls XiaoLuo ZhongLuo FengLuo ShangNao 1 ShangNao 2 Qing H Qing L Taiko Don Taiko Ka KoTaik1Ten KoTaik1Tsu KoTaik2Ten KoTaik2Tsu TsuzumiPon TsuzumiBnd OokawaChon Temple Blk KontikiKon Kontiki Ki Atari Kon Atari Chi Ainote 1 Ainote 2 GranCasaOp Field Sn FldSn OpRm FldSn ClRm OrchSn OrchSnOpRm OrchSnClRm OrTambHtOp OrTambHtCl OrTambHtSk Castanet Vibraslap SleighBel WindChime HandCym Op HandCym Mt FingrCymOp RibonCrash Timpani Tamtam No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Name No Assign ElecPerc 1 ElecPerc 2 ElecPerc 3 ElecPerc 4 ElecPerc 5 ElecPerc 6 ElecPerc 7 ElecPerc 8 ElecPerc 9 ElecPerc10 ElecPerc11 ElecPerc12 ElecPerc13 ElecPerc14 ElecPerc15 ElecPerc16 ElecPerc17 ElecPerc18 ElecPerc19 ElecPerc20 ElecPerc21 ElecPerc22 ElecPerc23 ElecPerc24 An Cowbell An Claves An Shaker ElcClaves1 ElcClaves2 ElecShaker HiQ Zap NLZap SynPerc ClickDelay An Clap T9 Clap HandClap HHopClap 1 HHopClap 2 HHopClap 3 HHopClap 4 HHopClap 5 HHopClap 6 HHopClap 7 HHopClap 8 HHopClap 9 HHopClap10 HHopClap11 HHopClap12 HHopSnap 1 HHopSnap 2 HHopSnap 3 HipHop FX XfdSnare 1 XfdSnare 2 XfdSnare 3 MG Kick 1 MG Kick 2 MG Kick 3 MG Kick 4 MG Kick 5 MG Kick 6 MG Snare 1 MG Snare 2 MG FX 1 MG FX 2 Synth 1 Synth 2 Synth 3 No. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 Name Vo Kick Vo Snare Vo SnOp Vo SnClR Vo Tom H Vo Tom M Vo Tom L Vo HH Op Vo HH OpE Vo HH Cl Vo HH ClE Vo HH Ft Vo HH Sp Vo Ride Vo China Vo Cowbell Vo Clap Lazer 1 Lazer 2 Noise 1 Noise 2 WhiteNoise Raspberry SE 1 SE 2 SE 3 SE 4 SE 5 SE 6 SE 7 SE 8 Uh Hey One Two Three Four Clk 1 Acc Clk 1 4th Clk 1 8th Clk 1 16th Clk 1 Trp Clk 2 Acc Clk 2 Beat Clk 3 Acc Clk 3 Beat Clk 4 Acc Clk 4 Beat DTX502 Owner’s Manual 87 Reference Specifications Tone generator Type AWM2 Maximum polyphony 32 notes Effect units Reverb: 9 types Master equalizer Quantity Preset: 50 User: 50* Number of voices Drums and percussion: 691 Keyboard: 128 Quantity Demo songs: 1 Practice songs: 37 Pad songs: 22 User songs: 40 Sequencer capacity Approximately 104,000 notes* Note resolution 96 subdivisions per quarter note Recording method Real-time recording Kits Songs Metronome Song format SMF User click sets 30 Tempo 30 to 300 BPM; tap tempo supported Time signatures 1/4 to 16/4, 1/8 to 16/8, and 1/16 to 16/16 Subdivisions Accents, quarter notes, eighth notes, sixteenth notes, and eight-note triplets Training Options 8 Triggers Trigger setups Preset: 14 User: 16 Import limit 20 files* Bit depth 16 bits Sampling format WAV or AIFF Display elements Backlit LCD with 2 rows of 16 characters; 3-digit, 7-segment LED; 2 LEDs for tempo display Connectors • Trigger inputs 1, 5, 6, and 9: Standard stereo-phone jacks (L: Trigger, R: Rim switch) • Trigger inputs 2, 3, 4, and 7: Standard stereo-phone jacks (L: Trigger, R: Trigger) • [HI-HAT CONTROL]: Standard stereo-phone jack • OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R]: Standard phone jacks • [PHONES]: Standard stereo-phone jack • [AUX IN]: Mini stereo-phone jack • [USB TO HOST] • DC IN Power consumption 4W Dimensions 251 (w) × 130 (d) × 48 (h) mm Weight 610 g Package contents Power adaptor (PA-130 or equivalent Yamaha-approved product), Owner’s Manual (this document), module holder, and module holder screws (x2) Audio files Other items *: Total memory capacity of 1 MB. Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corporation reserves the right to modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment, and options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 88 DTX502 Owner’s Manual Reference Index Symbols G [                     ] connector ....................... 11 [    ] button .............................................. 11 [<]/[>]              buttons ...................................... 10 [         ] button ......................................... 10 [    ] (Standby/On) button ....................... 10 [AUX IN] jack ......................................... 11 [HI-HAT CONTROL] jack ....................... 11 [KIT] button ............................................ 10 OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks ......... 11 [PHONES] jack ...................................... 11 [SAVE/ENTER] button ........................... 11 [SHIFT] button ....................................... 10 [SONG] button ....................................... 10 [USB TO HOST] terminal ................ 11, 79 VOLUME [+] and [–] buttons ................. 10 Gain .......................................................68 Groove Check ........................................38 Play mode .............................................. 30 Power adaptor ....................................... 12 Practice songs ....................................... 26 H Q Headphones ...........................................12 Hi-hat Splash Sensitivity ........................65 Hi-hat splash sounds .............................17 Hold Mode ..............................................61 Quantize ................................................ 52 A Acoustic Drums ..................................... 77 Alternate Group ..................................... 61 Auto Power-Off ...................................... 75 Auto Power-Off time .............................. 13 B Bell shots ............................................... 18 Bow shots ........................................ 17, 18 C Change Up ............................................ 44 Choking ................................................. 18 Clear User Kit ........................................ 65 Click Set .......................................... 32, 37 Closed sounds ....................................... 17 Computer ............................................... 79 Control Panel ......................................... 10 Copy Pad ............................................... 64 Copy Trigger .......................................... 71 Cord clip ................................................ 11 Count-In ................................................. 28 Crosstalk ................................................ 70 Crosstalk Pads ...................................... 70 CSAT924A ....................................... 77, 78 Cup shots .............................................. 17 Cutoff Frequency ................................... 59 Cymbal Sizes ......................................... 22 Cymbals ................................................. 18 D Data Dial ................................................ 10 Decay .................................................... 59 Default Settings ..................................... 14 Deleting ................................................. 54 Difficulty Level ....................................... 72 Double Bass Switch ............................... 61 DT10/DT20 ............................................ 77 E Edge shots ....................................... 17, 18 F Factory Set ............................................ 75 Fast Blast ............................................... 49 Fast Blast Timer .................................... 73 Foot Close Position ............................... 65 Foot-close sounds ................................. 17 I Ignore Timing .........................................72 Initial Setup ............................................13 Input Sources .........................................29 Instrument ..............................................20 Instrument Volumes ...............................19 K Kit .....................................................19, 20 Kit Lock ..................................................73 KU100 ....................................................76 L Layers ....................................................57 LCD screen ............................................10 Looping a Song ......................................28 M Master Equalizer ....................................74 Master Tuning ........................................74 Measure Break .......................................41 Menu Mode ............................................55 Metronome .............................................31 Metronome lights ...................................10 Metronome Output .................................74 MIDI Channel .........................................60 MIDI Control Change .............................63 MIDI Gate Time ......................................60 MIDI Note Number .................................60 MIDI Program Change ...........................63 Minimum Level .......................................68 Minimum Velocity ...................................69 Mixer settings .........................................57 Music Player ..........................................12 Muted Volume ........................................73 Muting ..............................................18, 27 R Rear Panel ............................................. 11 Recording .............................................. 51 Reference Manual ................................. 79 Reject Time ........................................... 69 Repeat Mode ......................................... 30 Restore .................................................. 75 Reverb Return ....................................... 62 Reverb Send (Source) ........................... 60 Reverb Send (Voices) ........................... 61 Reverb Type .......................................... 62 Rhythm Gate ......................................... 40 S Sensitivity .............................................. 19 Separately Sold Accessories ................. 76 Snare ..................................................... 16 Snare Adjustment .................................. 62 Song ...................................................... 26 Speakers ............................................... 12 Stereo Panning ................................ 24, 59 Storing your settings .............................. 56 T Tapping the Tempo ............................... 36 Tempo ................................................... 62 Tempo Up/Down .................................... 42 Timer ..................................................... 72 Training Mode ........................................ 38 Trigger input jacks ................................. 11 Trigger Setup ................................... 13, 66 Trigger Setup Link ................................. 63 Tuning .............................................. 22, 59 U USB ....................................................... 79 USB-MIDI driver .................................... 79 User kits ................................................. 25 User songs ............................................ 51 N V Noise Filter .............................................69 Number display ......................................10 Number Display Function .......................74 Velocity Curve ....................................... 67 Voice ................................................ 20, 58 Volume ............................................ 15, 59 O W Open sounds ..........................................17 Wait Time .............................................. 69 Wave Voice ........................................... 21 P Pad Control ............................................62 Pad Function ..........................................66 Pad Gate ................................................46 Pad Gate Group .....................................72 Pad set .....................................................7 Pad Songs .............................................29 Pad Type ................................................68 Part Mute ...............................................47 PCY90AT ...............................................76 PDF ..........................................................6 Y Y-cable .................................................. 11 DTX502 Owner’s Manual 89 90 DTX502 Owner’s Manual / Mode d’emploi Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu_en_01) Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques. Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels. Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC. En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprié des déchets. Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits. [Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne] Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d'informations. [Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne] Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée. (weee_eu_fr_01) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) Le numéro de modèle, le numéro de série, l'alimentation requise, etc., se trouvent sur ou près de la plaque signalétique du produit, située dans la partie inférieure de l'unité. Notez le numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve permanente de votre achat afin de faciliter l'identification du produit en cas de vol. N° de modèle N° de série (bottom_fr_01) DTX502 Owner’s Manual / Mode d’emploi 91 Yamaha web site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2013 Yamaha Corporation 211POGR*.*-01A0 Printed in Indonesia ZE12040
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92

Yamaha DTX502 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Instrumentos musicales
Tipo
Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para